JP7216163B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

A game machine, for example, a pinball game machine, is triggered by the entry of a ball into a starting hole, performs an internal lottery for a big hit, and performs a symbol variation display game, and during the symbol variation display game, the results of the internal lottery are displayed. It is configured to display various advance notice effects reflecting the to entertain the game. In this type of gaming machine, when a jackpot is won, after the jackpot game is over, it is known to shift to a game state advantageous to the player, such as a time saving state or a variable probability state (for example, Patent Document 1 below). ).

JP 2010-239986 A

However, in the conventional game machine, the transition to the time-saving state or the variable-probability state is limited after the big hit game, and the degree of freedom in the game and performance is poor, and the game lacks interest. In addition, if a player encounters a big hit before winning a big win (for example, a player does not win a big win even after playing the number of games twice or more than the denominator of the probability of a big win), the player's willingness to play is remarkably reduced.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of transitioning to a game state advantageous to a player from an opportunity different from winning a big win.

The above objects of the present invention are achieved by the following means.
(1) launching means capable of shooting game balls into the game area;
a starting means capable of detecting a game ball;
Lottery means for executing a lottery for a plurality of types of hits when the starting means detects a game ball;
a display means capable of variable display of patterns;
display control means for controlling the display means;
a winning game execution control means for controlling execution of a winning game when the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning;
A first game state in which the winning lottery probability is the first probability and a ball entering state to the starting means is a normal state, and the winning lottery probability is the first probability and the start. A gaming machine comprising game state control means capable of controlling at least a second game state in which the state of ball entry into the means is more advantageous than the normal state,
When the winning game is executed by the winning game execution control means, a first privilege granting means capable of granting a first privilege of controlling to the second game state after execution of the winning game;
After a predetermined start condition is satisfied, when the winning game is not executed by the winning game execution control means and the number of symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times, control is performed from the first game state to the second game state. a second privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege to
counting means for counting the number of times the symbol changes after the predetermined start condition is met;
The first privilege is a first privilege in which the period during which the second gaming state is controlled is a first period;
B first privilege, which is a second period in which the period controlled to the second gaming state is longer than the first period,
The second privilege is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege B,
Regardless of whether it is in the first game state or the second game state, the predetermined number of times includes the number of times of variation of the symbol whose lottery probability of winning is the first probability. Differentiate the period until the second privilege is granted by the second privilege granting means after the end of the second game state depending on whether the privilege is granted or the first privilege B is granted,
The display control means sets the period until the second privilege is granted to the display means, regardless of whether the first privilege is granted or the first privilege is granted. Suggestive display is possible ,
Said indication is
When displayed in a normal mode, it does not suggest the expectation that the lottery result in the variation is a hit,
When displayed in a special mode different from the normal mode, it suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the variation is a hit,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of transitioning to a game state advantageous to the player from an opportunity different from winning a jackpot.

1 is a front view showing the appearance of a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of a game board and an effect button. It is a block diagram which shows a control apparatus. It is a figure where it uses for description of hit classification and game state transition. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the screen display of the liquid crystal display device; It is a game flow for explaining game contents (usually, time saving, ST mode). This is a game flow for explaining game contents (Omen, Ceiling, Heaven mode). 4 is a flowchart showing main processing on the main control side; It is a flow chart which shows main control side timer interruption processing. 10 is a flowchart showing special symbol management processing in FIG. 9; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 start opening check process in FIG. 10 ; 11 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing in FIG. 10; 13 is a flowchart showing ceiling function management processing in FIG. 12; FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing ceiling activation management processing in FIG. 12 ; FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing game state transition preparation processing in FIG. 12; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a front part of processing during a special symbol confirmation time in FIG. 10. FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the latter part of the process during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. 10. FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a special electric accessary product management process in FIG. 9; FIG. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing a jackpot end process in FIG. 17; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows production control side main processing. It is a flow chart which shows production control side timer interruption processing. It is a figure which shows the game state transition table selection table for big hits. It is a figure which shows a game state transition table. It is a figure which shows the game state transition table for ceilings. It is a figure which shows a hit fluctuation|variation pattern distribution table (general, an omen, a ceiling, heaven time reduction use). It is a figure which shows the per variation pattern distribution table for ST (for ST beginning stage, ST middle stage, and ST end stage). It is a figure which shows a loss fluctuation|variation pattern distribution table (general, an omen, a ceiling, heaven time reduction use). It is a figure which shows the loss variation pattern distribution table for ST (for the early stage of ST, the middle stage of ST, and the end stage of ST). It is a diagram showing the relationship between the game mode type, the internal game state type, the variation pattern allocation designation number, and the game state determination number. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation in ST mode which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in ST mode based on the 1st modification of the same embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in ST mode based on the 2nd modification of the same embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pre-reading notice according to the embodiment; It is explanatory drawing where it uses for description of the modification of a privilege provision form. It is explanatory drawing where it uses for description of the modification of a privilege provision form.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the embodiments described below, a pachinko game machine will be described as an example of the game machine according to the present invention.

<1. Overview of Configuration: Figures 1 and 2>
An overview of the configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the front side showing the appearance of a pachinko game machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of a game board.

A pachinko game machine 1 (hereinafter abbreviated as "game machine 1") shown in FIG. A game board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted in a board housing frame (not shown), and a game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 faces the opening of the front frame 2. As shown in FIG. A glass door 6 supporting transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a. Also, on the back side of the game board 3, various control boards (see FIG. 3) for controlling game operations are arranged.

A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6. By inserting a key into this key cylinder and operating it to one side, the locked state of the glass door 6 with respect to the front frame 2 is released. , to release the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 and open to the front side.

Under the glass door 6, a front operation panel 7 is pivotally supported on the front frame 2 by a hinge (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. An upper tray unit 8 is provided on the front operation panel 7, and the upper tray unit 8 is formed with an upper tray 9 for storing discharged game balls.

The upper receiving tray unit 8 also has a ball ejecting button 14 for ejecting the game balls stored in the upper receiving tray 9 to the lower side of the gaming machine 1, and a game ball lending device (not shown) on the island facility side. A ball lending button 11 for requesting the putting out of the balls and a card returning button 12 for requesting the return of the value medium inserted in the game ball lending device are provided.

The upper tray unit 8 also has a push-button effect button 13 (first operation means) that also functions as a refreshing button 70, which will be described later, and buttons 75a, 75b, 75c, and 75c that point upward. A cross-shaped direction key 75 (second operating means) is provided, which is composed of a button 75d and can be operated in the up, down, left, and right directions. The effect button 13 or the direction key 75 functions as an operation means that can be operated by the player, and has a predetermined operation valid acceptance period (button valid period) in a specific advance notice effect (for example, so-called "player participation type effect"). During this validity period, if a predetermined operation (for example, single press, long press, repeated hits, etc.) is performed, the effect can be changed before and after the operation. It's like In addition, these operation means, "game setting screen (volume setting, light amount setting, production mode It is also used when the player makes his/her favorite game settings on the menu screen that allows settings such as . The effect button 13 is provided with a built-in lamp (button LED 13b) inside thereof, and depending on the difference in the light emission mode of the button LED 13b, the effective period of operation reception (for example, lighting or flashing in a predetermined color) and the operation A reception invalid period (for example, while lights are off) can be notified.

A firing operation handle 15 for operating a firing device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the right end side of the front operation panel 7 . This launching device 32 employs one having a launching performance of about 100 rounds per minute.

Speakers 46 are provided on both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and on the upper side of the shooting operation handle 15 to produce a sound effect (sound effect). Also, at suitable places of the game machine, for example, in the circumferential direction around the periphery of the front frame of the glass door 6 or inside the center decoration body 48, which will be described later, there is a decorative lamp 45 (directive LED) that exhibits a light effect by light decoration. Multiple are provided.

(Game board: Figure 2)
Next, referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 3 will be described. As shown in the figure, on the game board 3, a ball guide rail 5 for guiding the shot game ball is mounted in an annular shape as a board surface partitioning member. The game area 3a and the four corners are non-game areas.

A liquid crystal display (LCD) 36 is provided in a substantially central portion of the game area 3a. The liquid crystal display device 36 independently displays a plurality of types of decorative patterns (for example, the left pattern) by numbers, characters, symbols, etc. in a predetermined display area (design variable display area) under the control of the effect control unit 24, which will be described later. , middle pattern, and right pattern (see FIG. 5)).

In the game area 3a, a center decorative body 48 is provided so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a long way. The center decoration 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3, and forms a front mounting plate 48a fixed to the game board 3 and the outer periphery of the center decoration 48 to surround the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. It is integrally provided with an armor frame 48b to protect the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from surrounding game balls, and distributes the flow path of the game ball to the left and right depending on the strength of the game ball's launch or stroke length. It works as a channel distribution means that makes it possible. In this embodiment, a play area through which a game ball can pass is formed between the upper surface of the center ornament 48 and the ball guide rail 5, and a game ball hit by the launcher 32 into the upper part of the game area 3a is formed. is distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and flows down either the left flow path 3b on the left side of the center ornament 48 or the right flow path 3c on the right side.

In addition, the non-game area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 serves as various function display portions, and the 7-segment display (with dots) is placed on the upper starting port 34 (for the first special symbol) and the lower A special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device: first special symbol display means) and a special symbol display device 38b ( A second special symbol display device (second special symbol display means) is provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a 'special symbol variable display game' is executed by a variable display operation (variable display and stop display) of a "special symbol" represented by 7 segments. The above liquid crystal display device 36 temporally synchronizes with the variable display of the special symbols by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and variably displays the decorative symbols by images, and various advance notice effects (effect images) are displayed. Along with this, the 'decorative pattern variation display game' is executed. Details of the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game will be described later.

In addition, in the various function display units, next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a composite display device (holding composite display LED display device) 38c consisting of a 7-segment display device (with dots) is arranged. What is called composite is the display of the number of operation pending balls of special symbol 1, the display of the number of operation pending balls of special symbol 2, the display of the number of operation pending balls of normal symbols, the variable time reduction function in operation (during time reduction) and This is because it is a holding/time-saving/high-precision composite display device (hereinafter simply referred to as "composite display device") having five display functions, namely, state notification during a high-probability state (high-probability state).

Further, the various function display units are provided with a normal symbol display device 39a (normal symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged next to the composite display device 38c. In the normal symbol display device 39a according to the present embodiment, the normal symbol variation display game is executed by the variation display operation of the normal symbols represented by the two LEDs. For example, as a variable display operation, the normal symbols by the LED alternately turn on and off in a seesaw manner, and by stopping with one side lit up, the propriety of the normal symbol variable display game is made clear. there is

A right-handed display device 39b is provided adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a. This right-handed display device 39b uses a combination of the lit/unlit states of the LEDs to indicate whether a "right-handed shot" is advantageous in that the game ball passes (flows down) the right-hand flow path 3c. It informs whether "left-handed hitting", which aims to pass (flow down) the flow-down path 3b, is advantageous. For example, if the light emitting state of the LED is lit, it is notified that right-handed shots are advantageous, and if it is unlit, it is notified that left-handed shots are advantageous.

In addition, a round number display device 39c is provided adjacent to the right-handed display device 39b, in which two LEDs (round display LEDs) are arranged. The number-of-rounds display device 39c notifies the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) related to the big hit by combining the ON/OFF states of a plurality of LEDs.

Below the center ornament 48, there are an upper starting port 34 (first special symbol starting port: first starting means) and a lower starting port 35 (second special symbol starting port: second starting means). A normal variable winning device 41 is provided above and below, and detection sensors 34a and 35a (upper start sensor 34a, lower start sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of game balls are formed inside each. It is

The upper starting port 34, which is the first special symbol starting port, is the first special symbol (hereinafter, the first special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 1") in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device). In some cases, it is abbreviated as "Special Figure 1"). It is a winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation, and does not have a 'starting opening opening and closing means' that enables the opening or expansion of the starting opening. It is configured as a prize winning device. In this embodiment, due to the action of the game ball falling direction changing member (for example, game nail (not shown), windmill 44, center decoration 48, etc.) in the game area 3a, the left flow path to the upper start port 34 A game ball that has flowed down the path 3b is configured to easily enter (win a prize), while a game ball that has flowed down the right flow path 3c has a configuration that makes it difficult or impossible to enter.

The normal variable winning device 41 is configured as a "variable winning rate type winning device" capable of varying the winning rate of the game ball at the starting opening by the opening opening/closing means. In this embodiment, a pair of left and right movable wing pieces (movable members) 47 are provided as a starting port opening and closing means, and the lower starting port 35, which is the second special symbol starting port, is provided by opening and closing the movable wing pieces 47. can be opened or expanded.

In addition, the lower starting port 35 of the normal variable winning device 41 is the second special symbol (hereinafter, the second special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 2" in the special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device). , depending on the case, abbreviated as "Special Figure 2") is a prize winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation. Then, it is converted into an open state (easy winning state) that facilitates winning and a closed state (difficult winning state) that makes winning more difficult or impossible than in the open state. In this embodiment, when the movable wing piece 47 is inactive, the closed state (non-winning state) is maintained in which the lower starting port 35 cannot be won.

In addition, on both sides of the normal variable winning device 41, a total of five general winning openings, four on the left (43a to 43d) and one on the right (43e), are arranged. A general winning hole sensor 43h (see FIG. 3) is formed to detect the passage of the .

In addition, a normal symbol starting port 37 (third starting means) consisting of a passage gate through which game balls can pass is provided diagonally above the normal variable winning device 41, that is, above the middle part of the right flow path 3c. It is This normal symbol starting port 37 is a prize winning port related to normal symbol fluctuation display operation in the normal symbol display device 39a, and inside thereof, a normal symbol starting port sensor 37a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a passing game ball is provided. is formed. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol starting port 37 is formed only on the right flow path 3c side and is not formed on the left flow path 3b side, but is not limited to this and may be formed on both flow paths. .

In the middle of the route from the normal symbol starting port 37 to the normal variable winning device 41 in the right flow path 3c, there is a special variable winning configured to be able to open or expand the big winning port 50 by a projecting open door 52b. A device 52 (special electric accessory) is provided, and a big winning hole sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball entering the big winning hole 50 is formed inside.

A bulging portion (decorative member) 55 bulging out from the surface of the game board 3 is formed around the big winning opening 50, and the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55 forms a downstream guide portion of the right downstream path 3c. there is When the large winning opening 50 is closed by the open door 52b (large winning opening closed state), the downstream guide portion ( It is adapted to form part of the upper edge 55a). In addition, in the downstream area of the right flow path 3c, in the area above the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55, more precisely in the game area above the big winning opening 50, a flow path correction plate is provided substantially parallel to the downstream direction of the game ball. 51d is protruded, and functions to attract the falling game balls toward the big winning hole 50.例文帳に追加

The process of entering the game ball into the big winning hole 50 is as follows. A game ball that has passed through the floating area between the upper surface of the center decoration 48 and the ball guide rail 5 is projected from the game board 3 and is on the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulging portion 55 that functions as a guide for the game ball. flowing down along Then, the game ball contacts the right end of the flow path correction plate 51d protruding from the game board 3 surface, thereby correcting the flowing direction of the game ball to the direction of the big winning hole 50 (downward). At this time, if the large winning opening 50 is covered by the retractable open door 52b (closed state of the large winning opening), the game ball rolls on it, and the gauge configuration (not shown) By (arrangement of game nails), it is guided in the direction of the tulip-type normal variable winning device 41 (lower starting port 35). At this time, if the lower starting port 35 is in a winning state (starting port open state), a game ball can enter the lower starting port 35, but the open door 52b is retreating in the game board surface and the big winning port 50 is open (large winning opening open state), the game ball is guided into the large winning opening 50.例文帳に追加In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player aims at the firing position on the side of the special variable winning device 52 (when aiming so that the game ball passes through the right flowing path 3c), the upper start A game ball is difficult or not guided to the mouth 34 side. Therefore, in the "large winning opening closed state", unless the movable wing 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates, it is difficult or impossible to win the respective starting openings 34 and 35.例文帳に追加

To which of the left and right flow paths the above-described prize winning means belongs, that is, to which of the left flow path 3b or the right flow path 3c a game ball can win a prize, the prize winning means belonging to the left flow path 3b There are an upper starting port 34, a lower starting port 35, and a left general winning port 43a to 43d, and the winning means belonging to the right flow down route 3c includes an upper starting port 34, a lower starting port 35, and a normal symbol starting port 37, a large winning opening 50, and a general winning opening 43e on the right side. In addition, when the movable wing 47 is open (starting opening open state), the lower starting port 35 belongs to both the left flow path 3b and the right flow path 3c, and winning is possible from either the left or right flow path. It is possible. However, since the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35 has its operating condition that the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 37 located on the right side of the game area 3a (winning a prize), it is substantially flowing downward to the right. It can be said that it belongs only to route 3c. Also, the big winning hole 50 belongs only to the right-flowing path 3c, and only game balls from the right-flowing path 3c can win.

(Composition favorable to right-handed hits under specific conditions)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball is aimed to pass through the right flow path 3c and is hit to the right, the game ball tends to enter the normal symbol start port 37, but the upper start port A game ball is difficult or not guided to the 34 side. Therefore, in the "large winning opening closed state", unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates, it is difficult or impossible to win the respective starting openings 34, 35. However, this movable wing piece 47 operates in an opening/closing pattern that is more advantageous than at least the normal state (normal game state) when the later-described "state with electric sapo (state of electric sapo)" occurs. Therefore, if it is under the non-electric sapo (no electric sapo state), instead of "right hitting" aiming for the game ball to pass through the right flow path 3c, the game ball is made to pass through the left flow path 3b. ``Left-handed'' aiming is advantageous, and on the other hand, ``right-handed'' is more advantageous than ``left-handed'' in the electric sapo state. That is, depending on the game state, the game progresses to the player's advantage or disadvantage depending on which of the left-flowing path 3b and the right-flowing path 3c the game ball is allowed to flow down. As to which way of hitting "strikes" makes the situation advantageous for the player (game progress is advantageous for the player), it changes according to the game state, and the game state accompanied by the non-electric support state (for example, , Normal state or latent state), "left-handed" is advantageous, and "right-handed" is advantageous in a game state accompanied by an electric sapo state (for example, time-saving state or variable probability).

Each winning opening such as the upper starting opening 34, the lower starting opening 35, the normal symbol starting opening 37, the big winning opening 50, or the general winning opening 43 functions as winning means arranged in the game area 3a, and , upper starting opening sensor 34a, lower starting opening sensor 35a, normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, large winning opening sensor 52a, or general winning opening sensor 43a. It functions as winning detection means for detecting a ball. It should be noted that the number, shape, formation position, and the like of each of the prize winning means described above can be appropriately changed according to the game characteristics. In addition, regarding each prize winning means, whether the game ball flowing down either the left flow path 3b and/or the right flow path 3c is difficult to win, impossible to win, or possible to win is appropriately changed according to the game performance. be able to.

When a game ball wins in each winning hole, the number of prize balls per winning ball promised for each winning hole is paid out from a game ball payout device 19 (see FIG. 5). For example, there are 3 upper starting ports 34, 1 lower starting port 35, 0 normal symbol starting ports 37 (no prize balls), 15 big winning ports 50, and 3 general winning ports 43a to 43e. is paid out. The game balls that have not won the winning openings are ejected from the game area 3a through the out opening 49. FIG. Here, "winning" does not mean that the winning opening takes in the game ball inside, or the winning opening consists of a pass-through gate (for example, the normal symbol start opening 37 ), it means that the game ball passes through the gate, and in fact, when the game ball is detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning hole, the winning hole is "winning". is treated as having occurred. A game ball related to this winning is also called a "winning ball".

<Movable role>
In the game area 3a, a plurality of movable accessories are arranged at positions that do not interfere with the flow of game balls. In this embodiment, the first movable accessory 80 is arranged on the upper right side in the center decoration body 48, and the second movable accessory 90 is arranged on the obliquely lower right side thereof. The first movable accessory 80 includes a clock board portion 81 consisting of a number display portion divided into 12 number sectors with numbers from "I" to "XII" in Roman letters; and a clock hand 82 consisting of a short hand and a long hand formed rotatably, forming a "wall clock part" as a whole. In this sense, the first movable accessory 80 is also called a "clock-shaped accessory". The clock face part 81 has a full-color LED on the back side or inside for each sector division place indicated by the hour hand, or the number sector itself is composed of full-color LED, and each number sector is individually and independently colored. It is configured to emit light.

The second movable accessory 90 has a corolla composed of a plurality of petals arranged around the flower center, and a calyx is arranged around the outer periphery of the corolla to double the perianth, thereby forming the shape of a flower. A flower-shaped part 91 (first movable body 91) is attached to the tip of an arm 92 (second movable body 92) capable of swinging, and the flower-shaped accessory 90 as a whole is constructed. Note that the flower-shaped portion 91 has a plurality of petals that can rotate about the flower center as a center axis. This flower-shaped accessory 90 is normally stationary at the original position (indicated by the solid line in FIG. 2) defined on the edge of the liquid crystal screen or on the side outside the liquid crystal screen. tilts to move the flower-shaped portion 91 together with the arm 92 to a position (indicated by a dashed line in FIG. 2) covering the liquid crystal screen. 2, the flower-shaped portion 91 rotates at the tip of the arm, and the translucent flower center and petals can be illuminated from behind by lamps or full-color LEDs to create a beautiful light color. . When the flower-shaped accessory 90 finishes its action, it returns from the performance position indicated by the dashed line to the original position indicated by the solid line. The flower-shaped portion 91 can perform a plurality of types of motion patterns such as high-speed rotation, low-speed rotation, and reverse rotation as the petal rotation motion. A plurality of motion patterns are possible, such as a quasi-tilting motion that tilts up to the tilting angle, a vibrating motion that rattles the arm, and an inching motion. The clock-shaped accessory 80 (clock hands 82) and the flower-shaped accessory 90 (first movable body 91, second movable body 92) are used for advance notice effects and/or suggested settings to be described later, depending on their operation modes. It is also used when presenting a performance.

<2. Control device: Fig. 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, a control device for controlling game operations of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing the outline of the control device.

The control device of the game machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a main control board (main control means) 20 (hereinafter referred to as "main control unit 20") that controls overall game operations (game operation control). Then, an effect control board (effect control means) 24 (hereinafter referred to as “effect control unit 24”) that receives the effect control command from the main control unit 20 and comprehensively controls the execution control (appearance control) of the effect by the effect means ), a payout control board (payout control means) 29 for controlling the payout of prize balls by the game ball payout device 19, and the necessary power supply (including backup power supply) for each board of the game machine from an external power supply. and a power supply board (power supply control means (not shown)) that supplies the power. A liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control section 24 . A power supply route is omitted in FIG.

(2-1. Main control unit 20)
The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor containing a CPU 201 (main control CPU), and in addition to a control program describing game operation control procedures, a ROM 202 (main control unit) for storing various data necessary for game operation control ROM) and a RAM 203 (main control RAM) functioning as a work area and buffer memory are mounted, and the whole constitutes a microcomputer (equivalent to the Z80 system).

Although not shown, the main control unit 20 provides the Z80 system with a periodic interrupt, a pulse output generation function (bit rate generator) with a constant period, and a time measurement function, and provides an interrupt signal to the CTC and CPU. An interrupt controller circuit that enables/disables interrupts such as timer interrupts, a reset circuit that detects when the power is turned on or off, a power failure, etc., and outputs a system reset signal to reset the CPU, and a control program. A watchdog timer (WDT) circuit that monitors operation abnormalities, a designated area travel prohibition (IAT) circuit that monitors whether the program is being executed correctly within a preset address range, a certain range of hardware It also has a counter circuit for generating random numbers (hard random numbers). In addition, at least the main control unit (main control board) 20 and the payout control board 29 receive a voltage drop signal (power failure signal) from a power supply board (not shown), and start backup processing prior to power shutdown. The game operation before the power shutdown can be resumed after the power is restored (backup function). In this game machine 1, it is possible to hold each memory content of the RAM for at least several days.

The counter circuit includes a random number generating circuit for generating random numbers and a sampling circuit for sampling random numbers from the random number generating circuit at predetermined timings, and functions as a 16-bit counter as a whole. By sending an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state, the CPU 201 obtains the numerical value indicated by the random number generating circuit as a random number for internal lottery (random number for judging a big hit (magnitude of random number: 65536)). , the random number is used for the jackpot lottery. The internal lottery random number is obtained by adding a soft random number generated by appropriate software processing and a hard random number in order to prevent cheating such as hitting a hit.

In addition, the main control unit 20 includes an upper starting hole sensor 34a that detects winning to the upper starting hole 34, a lower starting hole sensor 35a that detects winning to the lower starting hole 35, and a game ball to the normal symbol starting hole 37. A normal symbol start opening sensor 37a that detects the passage of the, a large winning opening sensor 52a that detects winning to the big winning opening 50, and a general winning opening sensor 43a that detects winning to the general winning opening 43 are connected, The main control unit 20 can receive detection signals from these. Based on the detection signals from these sensors, the main control unit 20 grasps which winning hole the game ball has won (entered).

The main control unit 20 is also connected to an OUT monitoring switch 49a for detecting game balls discharged from the gaming machine through the out port 49 and each winning port (so-called out balls). A detection signal from 49a can be received. The main control section 20 has counting means for counting the number of out balls based on the detection signal from the OUT monitoring switch 49a. The number of out balls depends on whether or not the game ball is won at the starting ports 34 and 35 as long as the player continues to shoot game balls from the shooting device 32, that is, whether or not the symbol variation display game is executed. will continue to increase. Since the shooting performance of the shooting device 32 according to the present embodiment is 100 shots per minute, for example, if "today's total number of out balls is 30,000", the game machine 1 has been operating for 300 minutes. Operation information (cumulative number of out balls (pieces)/shooting performance (100 shots per minute). Therefore, the number of out balls (cumulative number of out balls) can be said to be one of game performance information defined by a specific value. The out-ball number information is used to calculate a base value (one of game performance information), which will be described later.

Further, the main control unit 20 is connected with a fraud detection sensor (for example, a vibration sensor, a radio wave sensor, a magnetic sensor: not shown) for detecting fraudulent activity on the gaming machine 1. Based on the detection signal, it is possible to monitor fraudulent activity with respect to the gaming machine.

The main control unit 20 also includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting opening 35, and a large winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling the opening and closing of the open door 52b of the large winning opening 50. are connected, and the main control unit 20 can transmit control signals for driving and controlling them.

A special symbol display device 38a and a special symbol display device 38b are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling the display of the special symbols 1 and 2. there is Also, the main control unit 20 is connected to a normal symbol display device 39a, and is capable of transmitting a control signal for controlling the display of normal symbols.

Further, the main control unit 20 is connected to a composite display device 38c, a right-handed display device 39b, and a round number display device 39c, and the main control unit 20 controls the display of various information displayed on these devices. A control signal can be transmitted.

A frame external terminal board 21 is connected to the main control section 20, and the main control section 20 transmits a signal (outer end signal) containing predetermined game information via the frame external terminal board 21 to the game machine. can be output to the outside of The frame external terminal board 21 is configured to be connectable to a so-called "data counter DT" or "hall computer HC" provided outside the game machine. The end signal is sent to the "data counter DT" and "hall computer HC". The main control unit 20, as the outer end signal, for example, winning game start information, winning information to the start opening (information on the start of fluctuation of special symbols), information on the number of winning balls, various security information (for example, fraud detection information, It is possible to output one or a plurality of outer end signals including generation information such as RAM clear, setting change, etc.). The data counter DT, based on the information contained in the outer end signal, specific game information (for example, the number of big hits, the number of games (number of fluctuations), the start / stop information of special symbols, winning information, etc.) It is a game information notification device that can notify, and is usually installed on the upper part of the game machine. The hall computer HC monitors and collects the game information of the game machine based on the outer end signal output from the external terminal board 21 for the frame, and comprehensively monitors the operation status of the game machines installed in the pachinko hall. It is a management computer dedicated to the game store to be managed.

The main control unit 20 also includes a RAM clear switch 98 for initializing a predetermined area (memory within the area) of the RAM 203, and a setting key switch for switching to a setting change permitting state in which setting values can be changed, which will be described later. 94, a setting change switch 95 for changing the setting value in the setting change permitted state, and a setting change completion switch 96 for confirming the setting value selected by the setting change switch 95 are connected. The unit 20 can receive detection signals from these switches.

In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 98, setting change switch 95, and setting change completion switch 96 are all push-button switches that can be operated by the operator. The setting key switch 94 is a key switch capable of switching between a setting change permitted state (ON) and a setting change prohibited state (OFF) by inserting a setting key and turning it ON/OFF. Note that these switches 95, 96, and 98 are formed at appropriate locations inside the game machine from the viewpoint of preventing cheating (fraudulent acts) such as illegally changing the set values, and unless the front frame 2 is opened, the game can be played. ON/OFF operation from the outside of the machine is impossible.

A setting display 97 (setting display means) for displaying information about setting values is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling the display. . The setting display 97 according to this embodiment is composed of one 7-segment display and is mounted on the main control section (main control board) 20 . In addition, the setting display 97 is not limited to the main control board 20, but the payout control board 28, the launch control board 29, the relay board (relay board that relays the connection between various display devices, switches, etc. and the control board: Figure not shown), or an effect control unit (effect control board (including liquid crystal control board)) 24, etc., can be provided at an appropriate place inside the gaming machine.

(About setting value)
The main control unit 20 is provided with a "setting change function" capable of changing the expected value (profit) of the profit given to the player, such as the payout rate (so-called machine discount, payout rate), for each stage. The "set value" is a value indicating this stage. This setting value can be confirmed by the setting display 97, and is set as appropriate by the pachinko hall clerk exclusively based on the sales strategy of the pachinko hall (game parlor).

For example, the "set value" defines the lottery probability (winning probability) of the big hit (hit type that the condition device described later will operate) for each stage. Winning probability) is set to be high, which is advantageous to the player. At least two stages (at least a first set value and a second set value) can be provided for such set values. In the present embodiment, six levels of setting values are provided, setting 1 to 6. For example, when the probability is low, setting 1 is 1/240, setting 2 is 1/231, setting 3 is 1/222, setting 4 is 1/210, setting 5 is 1/198, setting 6 is 1/189, and so on. That is, the higher the set value, the easier it is to win a big win (higher machine discount), which is advantageous to the player. In this way, the "set value" is a value that defines an event that affects machine allocation by stages, and means a value for a grade related to the likelihood of occurrence of a special event such as a big win. That is, the lottery probability of the big win at the time of low probability and/or the lottery probability of the big win at the time of low probability can be configured to differ according to the set value. In addition, when the jackpot lottery probability is in a high probability state (when the special symbol probability variation function described later is activated), the probability can rise to a value that does not exceed 10 times. However, the rate of increase may be the same or different for each set value. In the case of this embodiment, the rate of increase is the same for each set value. In the above example, if the probability of winning a lottery at low probability is 1 to 6 = 1/240 to 1/189, and the rate of increase is 3 times, the probability of winning a lottery at high probability is set to 1 to 6. = 1/80 to 1/63.

Also, when a plurality of types of jackpots are provided, the winning probability of one or more types of jackpots can be changed according to the set value. For example, when there are four types of jackpots 1 to 4, the higher the set value is, the higher the winning probability of all jackpots 1 to 4 may be. It may be configured so that only certain jackpots 1 to 3 win probability is increased (in this case, jackpot 4 has a common winning probability for all set values), or only a specific jackpot (for example, jackpot 1 only). ) may be increased (in this case, all set values for jackpots 2 to 4 have a common winning probability). Further, it may be configured such that the higher the set value is, the higher the combined winning probability of the jackpots 1 to 4 is. Also, the winning probability of the small hit type that does not trigger the operation of the condition device may be changed according to the set value, as in the case of the big hit described above.

(Regarding setting value change operation)
In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, at least the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are in the ON state, and the setting change permission state is set. It is controlled in a setting change prohibition state. When the setting change switch 95 is turned ON in this setting change permitting state, the current display value of the setting display 97 is changed to "1→2→3→4→5→6→1→2→3→...". The display is switched so as to circulate in the range from 1 to 6 as shown. Then, when the desired setting value is displayed, if the setting change completion switch 96 is turned ON (setting confirmation operation), the currently displayed value is confirmed as the current setting value, and the setting value data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 ( A predetermined area of the RAM 203 (in-area memory) is cleared. Then, when the setting key switch 94 is operated from the current ON state to the OFF state, the setting change permitting state is ended, and thereafter the game is started under the determined set values. The main control unit 20 of the present embodiment includes setting value selection means for selecting one of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player based on the operation of a predetermined operation means; setting value setting means for setting the setting value selected by the setting value selection means;

In addition, the main control unit 20 can transmit various game processing information such as information on the special symbol variation display game and error information to the effect control unit 24 by the effect control command according to the processing state. . However, in order to prevent slanderous actions from the outside, the main control unit 20 only transmits signals to the production control unit 24, and is configured for one-way communication in which signals from the production control unit 24 cannot be received. It's becoming

(About the performance indicator 99)
In addition, the main control unit 20 is connected to a performance indicator 99 (information display means) for notifying information (hereinafter referred to as "performance information") relating to the game result for a predetermined period (specific game period). 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling the display. The performance indicator 99 of this embodiment consists of a plurality of 7-segment LEDs. , and mounted on the main control board 20, for example, to form a display capable of displaying a four-digit number. Each 7-segment LED also has a decimal point DP (dot) below the 7-segment number. The above "performance information" is mainly used by pachinko parlors and related agencies for confirmation and investigation. It is information for investigating whether the game machine's original ball payout performance (designed ball payout performance) is being properly demonstrated, in other words, "information on game performance". Therefore, the performance information itself is information that is not directly related to the game progress itself when the player enjoys the game, unlike the advance notice effect and the setting suggesting effect, which will be described later. For this reason, the performance indicator 99 is not installed at a location visible to the player, but is mounted at a location within the gaming machine that is easily visible, for example, on the control substrate or on the substrate case that protects it. At least one of the four segments 99 a to 99 d of the performance indicator 99 may also be used as the setting indicator 97 .

In this embodiment, the total number of payouts (normal number of payouts) in the normal state (low probability of jackpot lottery probability (normal probability) and no electric sapo, which will be described later), and the cumulative number of out balls in the normal state (normal The number of payouts under normal conditions divided by the number of outflows under normal conditions multiplied by 100 (base value calculated by dividing the number of payouts under normal conditions ÷ the number of outages under normal conditions × 100) is calculated in real time. , is adopted as the above-mentioned "performance information", and is displayed in a predetermined manner by the performance indicator 99. FIG. The base value is displayed on the performance indicator 99 as a value rounded off to the first decimal place. However, instead of simply measuring permanently and displaying the base value (performance information), when the number of out balls being measured reaches a predetermined number (for example, 60000), the measurement is temporarily terminated. , the base value at the end of the measurement is stored in the RAM 203 as history information (the current base value is stored), and measurement of a new base value is started again. In the case of this embodiment, the above-mentioned "specified number (60000 pieces)", which is the trigger for ending the measurement, is not the number of normal outs, but the cumulative outs measured during all game states (including during winning games). The number of balls (number of outs in all states) is adopted, and this "number of outs in all states" is also measured in real time. The processing program for display control and base value on the performance indicator 99 and its work area are set in an area (outside memory) different from the area (inside memory) accessed by the CPU 201 during normal game progress. ing. Also, the performance information is not limited to the base value of the normal state described above, and is not particularly limited as long as it is useful game performance information.

A payout control board (payout control unit) 29 is connected to the main control unit 20. The payout control board 29 includes a launch control board (launch control unit) 28 for controlling the launching device 32 and a game ball payout. A game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 is connected.

The main role of the payout control board 29 is to receive the payout control command from the main control unit 20, control the prize ball payout of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control command, and provide information on the payout operation state to the main control unit 20 ( status signal). The main control unit 20 can transmit a control command (“payout control command” specifying the number of prize balls) regarding the payout to the payout control board 29 when it is necessary to pay out the balls. The payout control board 29 can transmit the state signal to the main control section 20 .

The payout control board 29 includes a full detection sensor 60 for detecting the state of game balls stored in the upper tray 9 (whether or not the upper tray 9 is full), the front frame 2 and/or the front operation panel. A door open sensor 61 (ON when open/OFF when closed) for detecting the open/closed state of 7 is connected, and the payout control board 29 can receive detection signals from these sensors.

In addition, the payout control board 29 is provided in the game ball payout device 19, detection from a supply shortage detection sensor 19a that detects the supply shortage of game balls, a ball counting sensor 19b that detects game balls (prize balls) to be paid out, etc. signal can be received. Also, the payout control board 29 can transmit a control signal for controlling the payout motor 19c of the game ball payout device 19 (motor for driving a ball payout mechanism (not shown) for putting out the game balls). ing.

The payout control board 29 outputs a "ball clogging" indicating a full state based on detection signals from various sensors such as the full detection sensor 60, the door open sensor 61, the supply shortage detection sensor 19a, and the ball counting sensor 19b. Signal", "door open signal" indicating that the front frame 2 and front operation panel 7 are open, "replenishment out signal" indicating insufficient supply of game balls, abnormal payout of prize balls (insufficient payout, excess payout) and a "payout completion signal" indicating that the payout operation has been completed. Based on these state signals, the main control unit 20 determines whether the front frame 2 and the front operation panel 7 are in an open state (door open error) and whether the dispensing operation of the game ball dispensing device 19 is normal ( Prize ball error) and whether or not the upper tray 9 is full (ball clogging error) are monitored.

A launch control board (launch control unit) 28 is connected to the payout control board 29 , and a launch control signal (launch permission signal ES) can be transmitted to the launch control board 28 . The shooting control board 28 controls energization of a shooting solenoid (not shown) provided in the shooting device 32 based on the shooting control signal, and realizes a game ball shooting operation by operating the shooting operation handle 15. . In addition, the strength of launching the game ball can be changed according to the operation amount of the shooting operation handle 15. - 特許庁

(2-2. Production control unit 24)
The production control unit 24 is equipped with a microprocessor that incorporates a CPU 241 (production control CPU), and includes a ROM 242 (production control ROM) that stores production data required for production control processing, and a RAM 243 that functions as a work area and buffer memory. It is composed mainly of a microcomputer equipped with a performance control RAM), and also includes a sound control unit (sound source LSI), RTC function unit (Real Time Clock), and a counter circuit (16 bits) for generating hard random numbers within a certain range. counter, 8-bit counter), an interrupt controller circuit, a reset circuit, a WDT circuit, and the like are provided to control the entire production operation. In addition, the RTC function unit is a clock IC that ticks the time, and is related to real-time time information such as the current time ("what is the current hour, minute, and second") and/or date (month, day, day of the week). Acts as a clock means to provide calendar information. In addition, like the main control unit 20, it also has a backup function and soft random number generating means.

The main roles of this production control unit 24 are reception of production control commands from the main control unit 20, selection and determination of production based on the production control commands, image display control of the liquid crystal display device 36, sound control of the speaker 46, various Light emission control of production LEDs (decorative lamp 45, button LED 13b, and other production LEDs), operation of various movable body accessories (watch-shaped accessory 80, flower-shaped accessory 90, rotating light 62, movable body 73) control and so on.

The effect control section 24 also includes a display control section (not shown) that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 36 . This display control unit includes a VDP that controls overall video output processing such as image expansion processing and image drawing, an image ROM that stores image data (effect image data) for which the VDP performs image expansion processing, and a VDP expansion. A VRAM (Video RAM) for temporarily storing the image data obtained, a liquid crystal control CPU for outputting control data necessary for VDP to perform display control, and a program describing the display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU and its It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal control ROM that stores various data necessary for display control, and a liquid crystal control RAM that functions as a work area and a buffer memory.

In addition to the above-described image display effects, the effect control unit 24 controls light displays including various effect LEDs such as the decorative lamp 45 and the button LEDs 13b and 62a in order to produce light effects, sound effects, or movable body effects. A light display control unit for the device 45a, a sound control unit (sound source LSI) for the sound generation device 46a including the speaker 46, and a movable body role for operating the movable bodies (clock-shaped body 80, flower-shaped body 91, arm 92) It includes a drive control section (motor drive circuit) for the object motors 80c, 91c, and 92c.

A position detection sensor 82a for monitoring the motion of the movable body role is connected to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 detects the current motion of the movable body role based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a. Its operation is controlled while monitoring the position (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position). The effect control unit 24 also monitors malfunctions in the motion of the movable body role based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a, and if malfunctions occur, performs predetermined error notification processing.

The effect control unit 24 is connected with the effect button switch 13a for detecting the operation of the effect button 13 and the direction key switches 75a' to 75d' for detecting the operation of the direction keys 75 (75a to 75d) to control the effect. The unit 24 can receive operation detection signals from the effect buttons 13 and direction keys 75 .

When a performance control command sent from the main control unit 20 is received, the performance control unit 24 determines by lottery or uniquely among a plurality of types of performance patterns prepared in advance based on the information included in the command. Then, various performance means are controlled at necessary timing to produce the desired performance. As a result, display of an effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 (image display effect), reproduction of sound from the speaker 46 (sound effect), and lighting and blinking of the decoration lamp 45 and other effect LEDs (light effect) are realized. , various production patterns (variation display operation of decorative patterns, advance notice production, etc.) are developed in time series, thereby realizing a "production scenario" in a broad sense. In addition, during a predetermined operation reception effective period, the effect control unit 24, based on the operation detection signal from the effect button switch 13a and the direction key switches 75a' to 75d' (for example, press, long press, repeated presses, pressing order of the direction key 75 in the up, down, left, and right directions) can be identified (operation identification means). It has a configuration that can control the appearance of the production.

The effect control command defines the function by a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and a 1-byte length event (EVENT). Bit 7 of ON and EVENT is OFF. When transmitting these information as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, the CPU 201 (main control CPU), when there is a command to be transmitted, sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from this setting, the first time strobe signal. Further, event (EVENT) information is set and output after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the transmission of this strobe signal, and the second strobe signal is transmitted after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to be in an active state by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period during which the CPU 241 (effect control CPU) can reliably receive commands.

Also, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal and executes a control program for command reception interrupt processing, so that the effect control command is acquired in this interrupt processing. It's becoming Further, unlike the CPU 201, when an interrupt occurs based on the input of the strobe signal, the CPU 241 is executing interrupt processing (periodically executed timer interrupt processing) based on another interrupt. Even if there is, the command reception interrupt processing is performed by interrupting the processing concerned, and the command reception interrupt processing is preferentially performed even if other interrupts occur at the same time.

<3. Outline of operation>
Next, a game operation of the gaming machine 1 using the control device (FIG. 3) will be described.

(3-1. Symbol variation display game)
(3-1-1. Special Symbol Variation Display Game, Decorative Symbol Variation Display Game)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 performs A "big hit lottery" is performed by random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 20 variably displays the special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b to start the special symbol variation display game, and displays the result in the special symbol after a predetermined time elapses. Derivation display is performed on the device, and the special symbol variation display game is ended.

Here, in the present embodiment, the big-hit lottery based on winning the upper starting port 34 and the big-winning lottery based on winning the lower starting port 35 are performed separately and independently. Therefore, the big-hit lottery result for the upper starting port 34 is derived from the special symbol display device 38a side, and the big-hit lottery result for the lower starting port 35 is derived from the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the side of the special symbol display device 38a, on the condition that the game ball enters the upper starting port 34, the special symbol 1 is variably displayed and the first special symbol variation display game is started. On the other hand, on the side of the special symbol display device 38b, on the condition that the game ball enters the lower starting port 35, the special symbol 2 is variably displayed and the second special symbol variability display game is started. ing. Then, when the special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, after a predetermined variation display time elapses, if the big win lottery result is a "big win", a predetermined "big win". When the result of the jackpot lottery is a ``small win'', the special pattern during variable display is stopped and displayed in a predetermined ``small win'' mode, and in other cases, in a predetermined ``losing'' mode. The game result (jackpot lottery result) is derived.

In this specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the side of the special symbol display device 38a will be referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second game on the side of the special symbol display device 38b will be referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1". The special symbol variation display game may be referred to as "special symbol variation display game 2". In addition, unless particularly necessary, "special symbol 1" and "special symbol 2" are simply referred to as "special symbol" (abbreviated as "special symbol" in some cases), and "special symbol variation display game 1" and " It may be referred to as a "special symbol variation display game" without distinguishing from the "special symbol variation display game 2".

When the above-mentioned special symbol variation display game is started, along with this, the decorative symbol variation display game is started by variably displaying decorative symbols (dramatic game symbols) on the liquid crystal display device 36. Then various productions are developed. When the special pattern variation display game ends, the decoration pattern variation display game also ends, and the special pattern display device reflects the predetermined special pattern indicating the big win lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the big win lottery result. A decorative pattern is derived and displayed. In other words, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by the decorative symbol variation display game including the decorative symbol variation display operation.

Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game (the result of the big win lottery) is "big hit", the decorative symbol variation display game develops an effect that reflects the result. Then, in the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (for example, the display state of "7" in the 7 segment), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays "left", "middle", and "right". ” in each display area, the decorative pattern reflects the “big hit” (hit pattern: for example, in each of the “left”, “middle” and “right” display areas, the three decorative patterns are “7”, “ 7” and “7” display modes).

When the "big hit" is achieved, specifically, the special symbol variation display game ends, and the decorative symbol variation display game ends accordingly, and as a result, the "big win" symbol mode is derived and displayed. After that, the large winning opening solenoid 52c (see FIG. 3) of the special variable winning device 52 operates to open and close the opening door 52b in a predetermined pattern, thereby opening and closing the large winning opening 50, and the game is played more than the normal state. A special game state (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is generated. In this jackpot game, until the opening time of the big winning opening by the open door 52b elapses for a predetermined time (maximum opening time: for example, 29.8 seconds), or the number of winning balls into the big winning opening 50 reaches the maximum winning number ( The winning area is opened or expanded until the upper limit of the number of winning balls allowed for the winning opening opened or enlarged by one actuation of the accessory is reached (for example, 10). If any of the conditions are met, the big winning mouth is closed (satisfaction of the round game end condition (closure condition)). )Repeated.

When the jackpot game starts, an opening effect is performed using the start interval time (start INT), and when the start INT ends, the round game is repeated multiple times with a predetermined number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) as the upper limit. done. In addition, when the current round game ends, the next round game is started after a predetermined interval time (INT between rounds). Then, when the maximum number of rounds is completed, an ending effect is performed using an end interval time (end INT), and a series of big winning games is completed. That is, the jackpot game is roughly divided into an opening period (start INT period), a round game period with the maximum number of rounds as the upper limit, and an ending period (end INT period). During the round game, the "in-round effect" appears, and during the round game (during the INT between rounds), the "INT effect between rounds" appears.

Regarding the information necessary for executing the decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20, based on the entry (winning) of the game ball into the upper start port 34 or the lower start port 35, specifically , on the condition that the game ball is detected by the upper starting opening sensor 34a or the lower starting opening sensor 35a and the starting condition (starting condition regarding the special symbol) is established, "big hit", "small hit" or "losing". If it is a ``big hit'', the type of the jackpot, if it is a ``small hit'', the type of the small hit, and if it is a ``losing'' A jackpot lottery including a 'symbol lottery (winning type lottery)' for drawing a lottery for the type of loss is performed (when there is one type of jackpot, small win or loss, the lottery is omitted because there is no need to conduct the pattern lottery. can be done), and based on the lottery result information, the variation pattern of special symbols and the special symbols (special stop symbols) to be finally stopped and displayed are determined. Then, as an effect control command that specifies the processing state, the effect control unit 24 outputs a "variation pattern specification command" including at least the special symbol variation pattern information (for example, the result of the jackpot lottery, the information on the variation time of the special symbol, etc.). Send to side. As a result, the basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the effect control section 24 . In this embodiment, a "decorative design designation command" including information on special stop designs (design lottery result information) is also transmitted to the performance control unit 24 in order to provide a wide variety of performances.

In addition to the big hit lottery result, the above-mentioned special symbol variation pattern information specifies the occurrence (execution) of a specific advance notice effect (for example, the reach effect type described later and the pseudo-continuous effect (including the number of pseudo-continuous times)). and can include Specifically, the variation patterns of the special symbols are broadly classified into a "hit variation pattern" in the case of winning and a "loss variation pattern" in the case of loss according to the result of the jackpot lottery, and these variation patterns include, for example, ``Reach variation pattern'' that specifies the execution of reach production (including specification of the type of reach), ``Normal variation pattern'' that does not specify the execution of reach production, 'Pseudo-continuation pattern' that specifies the execution of pseudo-continuation production and reach production Plural types of variation patterns are included, such as "with reach variation pattern", and "normal variation pattern with pseudo-continue" that specifies the execution of pseudo-continuous production but does not specify the execution of reach production. In addition, regarding the reach variation pattern and the pseudo-continuous variation pattern, basically, a longer variation time is set than the variation time of the normal variation pattern in order to secure the effect time of the advance notice effect.

Effect control unit 24, based on the information included in the effect control command (here, variation pattern designation command and decorative design designation command) sent from the main control unit 20, chronologically during the decorative design variation display game Decide the content of the production to be developed (production scenario) and the decorative pattern to be displayed finally (decorative stop pattern), etc., and according to the time schedule based on the special pattern fluctuation pattern, the decorative pattern fluctuation display During the game, To control the appearance of the variable display performance of decorative patterns. As a result, the decorative symbols are variably displayed by the liquid crystal display device 36 in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and during the period of the special symbol variable display game and during the decorative symbol variable display game. has substantially the same time width. The effect control unit 24 also controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the optical display device 45a, or the sound generator 46a so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variation display game. As a result, reproduction of images (image effect), reproduction of sound effects (sound effect), and lighting and blinking of effect LEDs such as the decorative lamp 45 (light effect) are realized on the liquid crystal display device 36 .

As described above, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and the display results of the special symbol variation display game are reflected in the decoration symbol variation display game. , these two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. In this specification, the above-described two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as "symbol variation display games" unless otherwise specified. Also, for convenience of explanation, the number of executions (the number of games) of the symbol variation display game (particularly, the special symbol variation display game) is referred to as "symbol variation number" or "variation number" or "** rotation (for example, one rotation). , 10 rotations, 1000 rotations, etc.)”.

(3-1-2. Normal symbol variation display game)
In addition, in the gaming machine 1, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 37 (winning a prize), the main control unit 20 performs an "assisting winning lottery" by random number lottery. Based on the result of the lottery, the normal symbol represented by the LED is variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 39a to start the normal symbol variation display game. It is designed to stop display by combination. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is "assist hit", the display unit of the normal symbol display device 39a is stopped and displayed in a specific lighting state (for example, two LEDs 39 are all lit).

When this "assist hit" occurs, the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) operates, whereby the movable wing 47 opens in an inverted "V" shape and the lower starting port 35 opens. Or it will be enlarged and the game ball will easily flow in (starting opening open state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as "general electric open game") that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state occurs. In this general electric open game, the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates (open operation), and the opening time of the lower starting port 35 (starting port open state time) is the maximum opening time (for example, a maximum of 6 seconds ) has passed, or until the number of game balls that have won the lower starting port 35 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 at maximum), the winning area is controlled to open or expand in an open state, and any of these conditions is satisfied. When it is satisfied, the opening operation of the movable wing 47 is completed and the lower starting port 35 is closed. Note that the lower starting port 35 can be opened once or multiple times within the maximum opening time.

(3-1-3. Operation retention ball)
In this embodiment, during the symbol variation display game, during the normal symbol variation display game, during the jackpot game, or during the general electric open game, when each start port 34, 35 or the normal symbol start port 37 wins, that is, When a detection signal is input from the upper starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, or the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, and the corresponding starting condition is established, this is used as data relating to the right to start the variable display game. Except for those related to the display, the reserved memory is stored up to the maximum number of reserved memories (for example, 4 at maximum) which is a predetermined upper limit. The data on hold which is not provided for the symbol variation display operation or the game ball related to the data on hold is also referred to as "suspended operation ball". In order to make clear to the player the number of activated balls held, a dedicated holding display (not shown) provided at an appropriate place on the gaming machine 1, or a holding display provided as an icon image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. light up the device.

Also, in this embodiment, up to four operation reserve balls relating to special design 1, special design 2, and normal design are reserved and stored in the corresponding storage area of RAM 203, respectively, and reserved as the number of determination of fluctuation of special design or normal design. In addition, the maximum memory number (maximum reservation memory number) of each operation reservation ball number regarding the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol is not particularly limited. Also, all or part of the maximum reserved memory number of each symbol may be different, and the number can be appropriately determined according to the game characteristics. In the following, the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol are also referred to as the special figure 1 operation reservation ball, the special figure 2 operation reservation ball, and the normal figure operation reservation ball.

(3-2. Game state)
Next, the game state will be explained. The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to generate a plurality of types of game states in addition to the big win which is the special game state. In order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, first, functions (means) related to the generation of various game states will be described.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a "probability variation function (probability variation function)" of which the main control section 20 (CPU 201) serves as the functional section. There are two types of probability variation function related to special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol probability variation function") and normal symbol probability variation function (hereinafter referred to as "normal symbol probability variation function").

The special pattern probability variation function is a function to generate a "high-probability state (big-hit high-probability state)" that is more advantageous than the normal state by varying the jackpot lottery probability from a low probability (normal probability) to a high probability. . Under the game state (high-probability state) in which this special symbol probability variation function is in operation, the big-hit lottery probability becomes high, so that the big-hit is likely to occur. As already described, in the case of the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery probabilities at the time of low probability and at the time of high probability differ according to the set value (see FIG. 4).

The normal pattern probability variation function varies the auxiliary winning lottery probability from a low probability with a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, from 1/256 to 255/256), which is more advantageous than the normal state. It is a function that generates "assistance hit probability change state". Under the game state in which this normal pattern probability variation function is in operation (assistance winning probability variation state), the assistance winning lottery probability becomes a high probability state, so the assistance winning is likely to occur, and the general electric open game occurs frequently. , the operating rate improved state in which the operating rate of the movable wing 47 per unit time is higher than that in the normal state.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a "fluctuation time shortening function (shortening of working hours function)" for which the main control unit 20 serves as the functional unit. There are two types of this, a time-saving function related to special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol time-saving function") and a time-saving function related to normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as "normal symbol time-saving function").

The special symbol time-saving function generates a "special symbol time-saving state" that reduces the average time required for one special symbol variation display game (average time from when the special symbol starts to change until it is stopped). It is a function that allows Under the gaming state (special symbol time-saving state) in which this special symbol time-saving function is in operation, the average variation time of the special symbols in one special symbol variation display game is shortened (for example, the average required for reach-less loss variation The time is shortened from 8 seconds to 2 seconds), and the lottery frequency improvement state is established in which the number of jackpot lotteries per unit time is improved compared to the normal state.

The normal pattern time saving function generates a "normal pattern time saving state" that shortens the average time required for one normal pattern fluctuation display game (average time from the start of normal pattern fluctuation until it is stopped). It is a function that allows Under the gaming state in which the normal design time saving function is in operation (normal design time saving state), the average fluctuation time of the normal design in one normal design fluctuation display game is shortened (for example, from 20 seconds to 0.6 seconds shortened), and the lottery number improved state in which the number of lotteries per subsidy per unit time is improved compared to the normal state.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment also has an "open extension function" for which the main control section 20 serves as the functional section. This open extension function is a function of generating an "extended open state" in which the opening operation period of the movable wing 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 (open time of the movable wing 47) is extended from the normal state. Under the extended open state, the opening operation period of the movable wing piece 47 (starting opening open state time) is extended from 0.2 seconds to 1.6 seconds, for example, and the number of times of opening and closing is increased, for example, once (open extension function is not in operation) to twice (when the opening extension function is in operation), resulting in an operating rate improvement state in which the operating rate of the movable wing pieces 47 per unit time is higher than in the normal state. Therefore, when the opening extension function is activated, the frequency of winning prizes to the lower starting port 35 increases, so that the frequency of fulfillment of the conditions for starting the special symbol variation display game for deriving the lottery result of the big win is higher than in the normal state. As compared with the state in which the opening extension function does not operate (non-operating), the game state becomes more advantageous for the player. In this respect, the open extension state is also referred to as an "electric tube support state (electric support state)".

By activating one or more of the above functions, the internal game state (internal game state) of the game machine can be changed. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the game state in which the special symbol probability variable function, the special symbol time saving function, the normal symbol probability variable function, the normal symbol time saving function, and the open extension function operate is called "probability variable state", and from among these functions The game state from which the special symbol probability variation function is removed is called a "time saving state", and at least the special symbol probability variation function operates, and the opening extension function does not operate (In this embodiment, the game state in which only the special symbol probability variation function operates ) is called the “latent state”, and the state in which all functions are not operating (non-operating) is called the “normal state”. Therefore, focusing on the jackpot lottery probability in these game states, when the game state is "time saving state" or "normal state", the jackpot lottery probability becomes 'low probability state (normal probability)', and the game state is In the case of the "probable probability state" or "variable probability state", the jackpot lottery probability becomes the "high probability state". Also, during the jackpot related to the operation of the conditional device, a winning game is generated in which the big winning port is opened and closed, but all the above functions are deactivated, and basically the same game state as the above normal state placed in

(High base gaming state)
In the present embodiment, the functions related to the normal design, that is, the three functions of the normal design probability variation function, the normal design time saving function, and the open extension function operate at the same opportunity. However, when focusing on the normal symbol probability variable function, the normal symbol time saving function and the open extension function individually, when at least one of these functions is activated, the operation rate of the movable wing 47 is improved. Since the winning frequency to the lower starting port 35 increases (becomes easier to win) in the rate improvement state, the game state is the frequency of establishment of the starting condition of the special symbol variation display game that derives the lottery result of the big win or the number of balls to be released. The rate (base) is higher than the normal state, resulting in a "high base gaming state (advantageous state for entering a ball at the starting gate)". It should be noted that the "high-base game state" here refers to a game state when the normal symbol-related function (at least one of the normal symbol probability variable function, normal symbol time saving function and open extension function) is activated, and special symbols It is different from the game state when at least one of the functions related to, ie, the special symbol probability variation function and the special symbol time saving function operates.

On the other hand, when focusing on the functions related to special symbols (special symbol probability variation function and special symbol time saving function) individually, when the above special symbol probability variation function operates, the jackpot lottery probability is higher than the normal state It becomes a "high probability state", When the special symbol working time saving function is activated, a "special symbol working time saving state" is established in which the special symbol fluctuation display game takes a shorter time than the normal state. In this respect, it is distinguished from the above-mentioned "high-base game state" in which the frequency of establishment of conditions for starting the special symbol variation display game is higher than in the normal state.

In the present embodiment, as an example of the "high base gaming state", at least the electric chew support state to which the opening extension function is provided is treated as the "high base gaming state". Under this electric chew support state, the operation rate (opening time and number of times of opening) of the movable wing 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 is improved, the winning rate to the lower starting port 35 is increased, and the frequency of winning per unit time is increased. Since it rises, it becomes a game state that is advantageous to the player compared to the case where it is not in the electric chew support state (low base game state). Focusing on the presence or absence of this electric chew support state, if the game state is "normal state" or "latent state", it becomes "no electric chew support state" (hereinafter referred to as "no electric support state"), When the game state is "time saving state" or "probability variable state", it becomes "electric chew support state present" (hereinafter referred to as "electric support state" or "electric support state").

(3-2-1. Internal game state (game state number YJ): Fig. 28)
Regarding the operation status of each of the above functions that determine the game state (special symbol probability change function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time saving function, and open extension function), on the main control unit 20 side, these functions Its operation (5AH)/non-operation (00H) is managed by the ON/OFF state of the corresponding flag. A game state focused on the operation status of each function is also called an "internal game state". What kind of internal game state the current internal game state is is managed using an identifier "game state number YJ". For example, if the game state number YJ is "00H", specify the 'normal state', if it is '01H', specify the 'probability variable state', if it is '02H', specify the 'time saving state', In the case of "03H", it designates the 'latency state'.

(3-2-2. Fluctuation pattern allocation designation number Tcode: Fig. 28)
Here, in this embodiment, one internal game state is further classified and managed in order to realize various effects related to the internal game state described above. Details will be explained later, but for example, the normal state includes multiple types of normal states such as "general" and "sign", and the variable state includes multiple types such as "ST beginning", "ST middle", and "ST end". Contains the variable state of. These are managed as different game states using an identifier "variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode". The entity of this variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode is an identifier (variation pattern selection mode data to specify).

The "variation pattern distribution table" is used when determining the variation pattern of the special symbols related to the symbol variation display game, and one or more types of variation patterns (variation patterns of special symbols) are at least It is determined in association with the current game state (fluctuation pattern allocation designation number Tcode) and the jackpot lottery result. For example, if the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode is "00H", the fluctuation pattern distribution table for the general mode is designated, and if it is "01H", the fluctuation pattern distribution table for the precursor mode is designated. be done. That is, even if the internal gaming state is the same "normal state", if the variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode is "00H", the variation pattern related to the variation pattern allocation table for the general mode is selected, When the variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode is "01H", a variation pattern related to the precursor mode variation pattern allocation table is selected (see S413 in FIG. 12 described later, FIGS. 24 to 27, etc.). ).

In addition, due to this, a plurality of types of "effect modes" related to the variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode are provided, and the effect under each effect mode is displayed (executed) on the effect control unit 24 side. It is possible to do so. Details of the effect mode will be described later.

Therefore, the operation status of each function (special symbol probability variation function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time saving function, and open extension function) related to determination of jackpot lottery probability and electric sapo, that is, "internal game When focusing on "state", even though it is the same "normal state", regarding the variation pattern of special symbols, selection of a variation pattern corresponding to a different variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode such as "general" or "precursor" It is possible, and it is possible to make an effect related to the variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode appear.

In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, the types of the "internal gaming state" include normal state, time-saving state, and variable probability state (see column "YJ" in FIG. 28). On the other hand, the game state related to the determination of the variation pattern of the special symbol, in other words, the type of game state related to the "variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode" when focusing on the determination of the effect, than the type of the internal game state "General", "Omen", "Ceiling", "Heaven", "Time saving", "ST early stage", "ST middle stage", and "ST end stage" are included (see column of "Tcode" in Fig. 28).

In this way, the "internal game state" when focusing on each function related to the determination of the probability of a big hit lottery and the presence or absence of an electric sapo, and the "variation pattern distribution" focusing on the determination of the variation pattern of special symbols (decision of production) By managing the specified number Tcode as being different, even if the internal game state is the same (for example, normal state), the variation patterns corresponding to the different variation pattern distribution specified numbers Tcode (for example, general and precursor) can be selected. As a result, even under the same internal game state, it is possible to greatly change the digestion time of the symbol variation display game (variation time of special symbols) and related effects, and the same internal game state can be achieved. The degree of freedom of production in the game can be improved, and a wide variety of productions can be provided.

In this specification, at least the game state related to the variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode will be referred to as a "game mode" unless otherwise required (see the "game mode type" column in FIG. 28). This game mode is, as shown in FIG. 28, a game state corresponding to "variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode and game state number YJ (internal game state)", in other words, "game state as viewed as the whole game machine". ” can also be treated as For convenience of explanation, the internal game state and the game mode may be simply referred to as "game state" without distinguishing between them. In addition, the variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode will be referred to as "variation pattern selection mode (Tcode)", and abbreviated as "Tcode" as appropriate.

<4. About hit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the "hit" according to this embodiment will be described. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning type, winning game operation mode, and transition destination game state (shift destination game mode) after the winning game.

(4-1. About hit type)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, a plurality of types of hit types such as probability variable jackpots 1 to 6 and time-saving jackpots 1 to 2 are provided as jackpot lottery target hit types. These hits are hits that belong to the "big hit type" that triggers the operation of the condition device, and are different from hits that belong to the so-called "small hit type" that does not trigger the operation of the condition device (minor hits). Here, the "conditional device" is a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device (device that continuously operates the special electric accessory) for playing the round game. or when a game ball passes through a specific area in the big prize hole (excluding those that win the big prize hole while the continuous actuating device is in operation). . In addition, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is a condition for causing a state with electric sapo (open extension function operation) and probability fluctuation (shifting from one internal game state to another internal game state). .

Therefore, when a small win is won, the condition device does not operate and the accessory continuous operation device does not operate, so there is no transition to the internal game state (the internal game state transition control due to the small win is not performed). cannot be broken). In addition, in the winning game (small winning game) by the small winning, since the accessory continuous operation device does not operate, a round game like the big winning is not executed, but depending on how the opening and closing pattern of the big winning opening is determined, A "pseudo-round game" that behaves as if a round game is being executed can be realized. The operation mode of the small winning game is basically the same as the big winning game except that the round game is not executed, and after the predetermined start INT has passed, the "opening and closing operation game" that opens the big winning opening is executed. Then, when the opening/closing operation game is completed, a series of small winning games are completed after a predetermined end INT. Such a small win is a winning type that serves as an opportunity (execution opportunity) to shift to a winning game (special game state) that involves opening and closing the big winning opening like the big win. be different.

Further, when a small hit is won, the transition to the internal game state is not performed, but the transition to the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) can be performed. By using such a transition form, for example, when the game state after the small winning game and the game state after the other big winning game are shifted to the same variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), the same effect is produced in both. It can be made to stay in production mode. Also, due to the small hit, it is possible to shift from the first variation pattern selection mode to the second variation pattern selection mode, or to re-shift from the second variation pattern selection mode to the first variation pattern selection mode. is. In addition, although "small hits" are not provided in this embodiment, it is possible to provide one or more types of small hits for the lottery targets on the special figure 1 side and / or special figure 2 side in consideration of game characteristics. can.

In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the probability variable jackpots 1 to 3 and the time-saving jackpots 1 and 2 are the special symbol 1 side jackpot lottery targets, and the probability variable jackpots 4 to 6 are the jackpot lottery targets on the special symbol 2 side. It's becoming Also, the symbol lottery probability is as illustrated.

(4-2. Winning game)
Next, the contents of the winning game based on each winning described above will be described.

The notations of "5R", "7R", and "10R" in the probability variable jackpots 1 to 7 and time-saving jackpots 1 to 2 in the column of "win content" in FIG. Each jackpot of the present embodiment is a "long opening time" in which the maximum opening time of the big winning opening in one round game can be sufficiently expected that the number of winnings to the big winning opening reaches the maximum number of winnings (10). (for example, 29.8 seconds)”. It should be noted that the opening pattern of the big winning opening related to the round game can be determined freely. For example, at least part of the round game (round game of a specific number of rounds) opening pattern of the big winning opening is set to "short opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds)" shorter than the long opening time or In addition, it may be set to a short "extremely short opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds)". Also, during the maximum opening time, the big prize opening may be kept open, or an opening pattern involving one or more closings (for example, "open for 1.3 seconds + close for 0.5 seconds + open for 27 seconds", etc.) may be The profit state (profit degree) during the jackpot game increases as the maximum number of rounds is relatively large, and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening is higher than that when the maximum opening time is short. In the case of this embodiment, since the maximum opening time for each big win is the same, the larger the maximum number of rounds, the higher the profit status during the big win game.

(4-3. Transition destination game state after winning game: Fig. 4)
Next, a description will be given of the game state (game mode) to be shifted after the end of each big hit game. In the column of "game state at the time of winning / game state to shift" shown in FIG. relationship is shown. In this embodiment, the game state after the big win game is determined based on at least the big win type and the internal game state. Specifically, when the jackpot is won, the game state after the jackpot game is determined based on the game state (internal game state or game mode) at the time of winning and the type of the jackpot. (See later-described game state transition table selection table in FIG. 21 and game state transition table in FIG. 22). In addition, the "game state at the time of winning" in FIG. internal game state).

In order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, first, the internal game state to be shifted after the jackpot game will be described. The details of the game mode transition mode will be described later with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG.

(4-3A. If you win the time-saving jackpot (time-saving jackpot 1-2))
First, the case of winning the time saving jackpot 1 (5R time saving A) and the time saving jackpot 2 (5R time saving B) will be described. When these time-saving jackpots 1 and 2 are won, at least the internal game state is shifted to "time-saving state (YJ=02H)" regardless of the game state at the time of winning. Time-saving jackpots 1 and 2 are called “time-saving jackpots” in that they are jackpots that trigger a transition to a time-saving state.

When the transition to the above "time saving state", the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game (the number of symbol variations) is continued until the predetermined specified number of times is completed, and a big hit within the specified number of times (however, the internal game state When the special symbol variation display game ends without winning a small win that does not trigger the transition, the game is shifted to the "normal state (YJ=00H)" from the next game. In the case of this embodiment, the specified number of times is counted for the total number of executions of the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 (the total number of variations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2) (counting of the number of STs described later). , the same applies to counting the number of ceiling games).

When the time-saving jackpot 1 is won, the number of times of time-saving is set to 100 times (time-saving A) as the prescribed number of times, and when the time-saving jackpot 2 is won, the number of times of time-saving is set to 50 times (time-saving B). That is, the time-saving jackpots 1 and 2 of the present embodiment are finite time-saving jackpots that give a finite number of time-saving times. In addition, a jackpot (infinite time-saving jackpot) may be provided to continue the time-saving state until the next jackpot election (the number of time-saving times is infinite). Also, the number of time-saving jackpots 1 and 2 may be the same number of times, or only one type of time-saving jackpot may be used.

(4-3B. If you win the probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot 1 to 7))
Next, the case where the probability variable jackpots 1 to 7 are won will be explained.

When one of the variable probability jackpots 1 to 7 is won, at least the internal game state is shifted to the "variable probability state (YJ=01H)" regardless of the game state at the time of winning. The variable probability big hits 1 to 7 are called "variable probability big hits" in that they are the big hits that trigger the transition to the variable probability state.

In the case of shifting to the "probability variable state", as in the case of shifting to the time-saving state described above, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game (the number of symbol variations) continues until a predetermined specified number of times is completed. When the special symbol variation display game ends without winning a jackpot within the prescribed number of times, the probability variation state ends, which is the so-called ``number-cut probability variation type (ST type (limited probability variation type))''. To be precise, after the jackpot lottery probability is at least shifted to a game state with a high probability state (probability variable state or latent probability state), if the above specified number of times ends without winning the jackpot, the high probability state ends. Then, the jackpot lottery probability is shifted to a low probability state. The upper limit number of times that this high probability state continues is called "ST number". Therefore, after being moved to the probability variation state, when the probability variation state ends when the number of times of ST ends and moves to the normal state (YJ = 00H) (probability variation A described later) and when the ST number of times ends In the case where only the high probability state ends, in detail, only the "special symbol probability change function" ends from "special symbol probability change function, special symbol time reduction function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time reduction function, and open extension function". It includes a case (probability variation B, probability variation C described later) that is shifted to "time saving state (YJ = 02H)".

In the variable probability state of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of variable probability state (variable probability A, variable probability B, and variable probability C) with different ST numbers are provided, and according to the jackpot type won, variable probability A, variable probability B, variable probability It is designed to be transferred to either of C. Although details will be described later, when focusing on the game mode, ST100 mode when shifting to probability variation A, ST75 mode when shifting to probability variation B, ST25 mode when shifting to probability variation C, etc. The game mode is shifted to a game mode corresponding to variable probability A to C (see FIG. 6).

(Probability A, probability B, probability C)
The "probability variation A", "probability variation B", and "probability variation C" will be described.

(B) Probability A (ST100 mode)
The probability variation A is a probability variation state in which the number of times of ST is set to 100 times. In the present embodiment, when the probability variable large 1, the probability variable big hit 4, or the probability variable big win 7 is won, the game is shifted to the probability variable A. In the case of shifting to variable probability A, when 100 times of ST are completed without winning a jackpot, the "variable probability state" is ended, and the internal game state is shifted to the "normal state" from the next game.
(B) Probable variation B (ST75 mode)
The probability variation B is a probability variation state in which the number of STs is set to 75 times (the number of STs of the probability variation B<the number of STs of the probability variation A). In this embodiment, when the probability variable jackpot 2 or the probability variable jackpot 5 is won, the game is shifted to the probability variable B. In the case of shifting to variable probability B, when 75 times of ST are completed without winning a jackpot, the ``variable probability state'' is terminated, and from the next game, the game is shifted to the ``time saving state'' with 25 times of time saving. Specifically, after the transition to the variable probability state after the jackpot game, when the predetermined number of ST is completed, only the high probability state is terminated (the special symbol variable probability function is turned OFF), and the game state is changed to "low probability state + electricity State with support", that is, shift to "time saving state" (Here, probability variation B = "ST number 75 times + time saving number 25 times"). Then, when the number of times of time saving ends 25 times without winning a jackpot, the "time saving state" ends, and the game is shifted to the "normal state" from the next game. Therefore, the electric sapo itself is designed to be given 100 times, just like the above-mentioned probability variation A, but the probability variation B is shifted to the time saving state after the predetermined number of STs is completed, and the above-mentioned probability variation A very different from
(C) Variable probability C (ST25 mode)
The variable probability C is a variable probability state in which the number of STs is set to 25 times (the number of STs of the variable probability C<the number of STs of the variable probability B). In this embodiment, when the probability variable jackpot 3 or the probability variable jackpot 6 is won, the game is shifted to the probability variable C. When it is shifted to the variable probability C, when the number of times of ST ends 25 times without winning a big hit, the "variable probability state" ends, and from the next game, it is shifted to the "time-saving state" with the number of times of time-saving 75 times (Here, Probability variation C = “ST number of times 25 times + time saving number of times 75 times”). Then, when the number of times of time saving ends 75 times without winning a jackpot, the "time saving state" ends, and the game is shifted to the "normal state" from the next game. Like the probability variation A and B, the probability variation C is also given 100 electric sapo times.

In addition, the definite variable jackpots 2, 3, 5, and 6 are “pure definite variable jackpots (variable definite However, in this specification, it is treated as belonging to "variable probability big hit" in that it first shifts to a variable probability state. Therefore, to be precise, there are "variable probability big hit" that does not give the time saving state and "variable time saving big hit" that gives the time saving state.

The above-mentioned variable probability A, variable probability B, and variable probability C have the same number of electric sapo times (number of times with electric sapo) (100 times), but at least one of the variable probability A, variable probability B, and variable probability C is different. It may be the number of electric support. For example, variable A is 200 electric sapo, variable B is 150 electric sapo, variable C is 100 electric sapo, variable A is 200 electric sapo, variable B is 150 electric sapo, variable C is 150 can be times. In addition, the variable probability B and the variable probability C have been described as shifting from the variable probability state to the time saving state, but the variable probability state may not be shifted to the time saving state, that is, the variable probability state may be accompanied by a predetermined number of STs. In other words, the variable probability big hits 2, 3, 5, and 6 may be defined as the same “variable probability big hits” as the variable probability big hits 1 and 7 instead of the “variable probability big hits in short time”. Further, at least a part of the variable probability big hit of the present embodiment may be a latent probability big hit (latent probability state transition opportunity big hit). For example, the probability variation jackpot 1 to 3 on the special figure 1 side can be set as the latent probability jackpot.

<5. About production>
(5-1. Production mode)
Next, the production mode (production state) will be described. The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of production modes related to the game state (internal game state and/or variation pattern selection mode). A production can appear. Each production mode is basically configured to be transition controllable between each production mode according to the transition (update) of the game state, for example, "normal production mode" related to "normal state", time saving state There are multiple types of production modes according to each game state, such as "time-saving production mode" related to the variable state, "probable variable production mode (ST production mode)" related to the variable state, and "short-time production mode" related to the time-saving state. It is In addition, in each production mode, the background display (background production) as the background of the variable display screen of decorative patterns is provided so that the player can grasp what kind of game state the player is staying in under the production mode. BGM is controlled to be switched to a background display related to the game state. Details of each effect mode will be described later with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG.

The production control unit 24 (CPU 241) has a functional unit (production state transition control means) that controls the transition between the plurality of types of production modes. The effect control unit 24, among the effect control commands sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU 201), specifies the effect control command including information about the game state, specifically, the current game state, the game state Based on the information contained in the specific production control command that designates that the production mode is transferred, the production mode is configured to be manageable. As a result, the effect control unit 24 manages the effect mode in a form that maintains consistency with the game state on the main control unit 20 side, and controls the transition from one effect mode to another effect mode according to the processing state. do. The above-mentioned specific effect control commands include, for example, a variation pattern designation command, a game state designation command, and a specific command (jackpot start command, jackpot end command) transmitted during winning.

(5-2. Notice production)
Next, the advance notice effect will be described. The effect control unit 24 is based on at least the variation pattern information included in the variation pattern specification command (in this embodiment, the information included in the variation pattern specification command and / or the decorative pattern specification command), various related to the jackpot lottery result It is configured to be able to control the appearance of the "notice effect" (notice effect appearance control means). The main role of the notice effect is to suggest (notice) the expectation of whether or not the winning type has been won (the well-known "winning expectation"), and the expectation of occurrence of a specific notice effect (specific notice occurrence expectation) Suggest and so on. Many of the advance notice effects work as a "promotion effect" for arousing the player's expectation of winning. Typical examples of advance notice effects include "reach effect", "pseudo continuous effect", "player participation type effect", and "pre-reading effect". There are various announcement effects (so-called step-up effects, cut-in effects, etc.) that occur redundantly) or independently.

(5-2-1. Reach production)
The “ready-to-win effect” refers to an effect mode accompanied by a ready-to-win state (so-called tenpai state), and specifically refers to an effect mode in which the game result can be derived and displayed via the ready-to-win state. In the reach production, when a specific reach production appears, the expectation of winning is relatively higher than when a normal reach production (N reach (normal reach) appears). It is called “SP reach (super reach).” SP reach has a relatively longer production time (fluctuation time) than N reach in order to arouse the player's expectation of winning. The above N reach and SP reach include a plurality of types of reach associated with winning expectations.

When the game results in winning, most of the winning symbols (for example, matching symbols) are derived and displayed via this ready-to-win effect. That is, in the process of deriving and displaying the winning symbols, some kind of ready-to-win effect can appear. Therefore, the presence or absence of the ready-to-win effect is a clue for the player to know the possibility of winning. Therefore, a plurality of types of "notice effects" are provided as an effect mode for foretelling (suggesting) the possibility of occurrence of the ready-to-win effect, in other words, as an effect mode for more clearly foretelling the degree of expectation for winning. This "notice effect" plays a role as an agitation effect that foretells the expectation of winning, but there is a possibility that a specific effect (for example, a reach effect or a pseudo-ren) may occur, or a specific effect It also plays the role of deterministically reporting the occurrence. Therefore, for example, in the ready-to-win effect scenario, there is a case where a certain advance notice effect occurs before the ready-to-win effect occurs to announce the possibility of occurrence of the ready-to-win effect and the degree of winning expectation. In other words, when the ready-to-win effect is accompanied by another announcement effect, the degree of expectation for winning is more clarified than when the ready-to-win effect occurs alone, and the player's expectation for winning can be aroused. In addition, in relation to the jackpot lottery result, one or more types of expected advance notice effects may occur in combination (simultaneously or overlappingly). , a clearer winning expectation is shown. For example, if a low-expectation notice effect with a low winning expectation is combined with a high-expectation notice effect with a high winning expectation, the winning expectation will be further increased, and if multiple high-expectation notice effects are combined , the expectation of winning will increase dramatically.

(5-2-2. Pseudo-continuous performance (pseudo-continuous))
"Pseudo-continuous" refers to an effect mode accompanied by a pseudo-continuous-variation display state of decorative symbols (so-called "pseudo-variation"). This "pseudo-fluctuation" is a display operation in which, during a decorative pattern fluctuation display game, some or all of the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped, and then the decorative patterns are displayed again in a variable manner from the temporarily stopped state. Refers to a variable display mode that repeats once or multiple times. In this respect, it is different from the later-described "predictive effect" that can be executed over a plurality of symbol variation display games. The rate of occurrence of "pseudo-runs" is basically determined such that the higher the number of pseudo-changes, the higher the expectation of winning. For example, when the number of pseudo fluctuations is two times rather than once, the expectation of occurrence of the announcement effect (for example, SP reach) with high expectation of winning is increased. Therefore, in the case of a production scenario including a ready-to-win production, the "pseudo-run" is mainly generated in the stage before the ready-to-win state is formed (the stage before the ready-to-win production), and after one or more times of pseudo fluctuation , the ready-to-win effect, which is the main variation, is executed, and the final game result is derived and displayed. In this specification, when pseudo N is used, it means the total number of pseudo fluctuations M times and the main fluctuation. For example, "pseudo 2" means "pseudo fluctuation 1 time + main fluctuation", and "pseudo 3" means "pseudo fluctuation 2 times + main fluctuation".

(5-2-3. Player Participation Production)
"Player-participation type effect" is a mode of effect belonging to the so-called "button advance notice effect", in which a predetermined operation (for example, pressing once, long (push, repeated hits, etc.) is performed, the content of the presentation can change based on the content of the operation. In the player-participation type effect, an "operation instruction effect" for instructing the operation means to perform a predetermined operation appears during a predetermined button effective period, and the player operates the operation means during the button effective period. When operated, the presenting effect changes to another effect (effect at the time of operation) based on the content of the operation, and depending on the effect mode (details of effect) before and after the operation, the degree of winning expectation, winning or losing, or setting suggestion information. etc. can be reported. The performance control unit 24 is a functional unit (operation effective period setting means); pre-operation effect control means capable of controlling the appearance of a predetermined pre-operation effect during the button effective period; is provided with an operation effect control means capable of controlling the execution of

(5-2-5. Look-ahead notice effect)
"Pre-reading notice effect" (hereinafter abbreviated as "pre-reading notice") refers to the operation suspension ball (undigested operation suspension ball) that has not yet been provided for the execution of the symbol variation display game (variation display operation of special symbols) , Mainly, using the pending display mode (holding change system pre-reading notice) and the effect in the design variation display game that is executed earlier in time series (symbol change medium-system pre-reading notice), the winning related to the operation holding ball This is an effect mode that can notify the degree of expectation in advance.

An overview of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device according to the present embodiment, including the pre-reading notice, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 according to this embodiment.

In a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (in the illustration, below the display area of the decorative pattern), a reservation display area 76 that displays the number of special figure 1 operation reservation balls and the number of special figure 2 operation reservation balls A reservation display area 77 is provided to display the presence or absence of the operation reservation ball, which is lit (with operation reservation ball: "○ (white circle)" in the illustration) or off (no operation reservation ball: Information on the current number of pending balls in operation is reported at (broken line circle mark in the figure).

The display regarding the presence or absence of this operation pending ball (hereinafter referred to as "holding display") is displayed in the order of occurrence (in the order of prize winning). It is displayed as the earliest (that is, the oldest) activated suspended ball on the time axis among all activated suspended balls in the suspension display. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, a portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is provided with the same number of pending icons (icon images) as the maximum number of pending memories (4). (corresponding to special design 1 side), a2 to d2 (corresponding to special design 2 side) are provided. Further, on the left side of the holding display areas 76 and 77, there is provided a changing display area 78 for showing the active holding ball currently being used in the special symbol changing display game. In the case of this embodiment, the changing display area 78 is configured so that an image in which the icon of the game pending K currently being played is placed on the icon of the strike seat J appears. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is started, the oldest pending a1 or a2 icon (icon image) displayed in the pending display areas 76, 77 is the game running pending K As an icon, it moves onto the icon of the striker J in the changing display area 78, and this state is maintained for a predetermined display time. Depending on the game state (game mode or internal game state), for example, during the first game state (normal mode (normal state)), the display area of the pending display area 76 is emphasized more than the pending display area 77. (preferential display, large display, etc.), on the contrary, during the second game state (for example, time saving mode (time saving state) or ST mode (variable probability state)), the holding display area The display area 77 can be displayed more emphatically than the reserved display area 76 . Further, both the reserved display areas 76 and 77 can be displayed during the first game state, and the reserved display area 77 can be preferentially displayed during the second game state.

When an operation pending ball occurs, as a production control command, the prefetch judgment information related to the jackpot lottery result and the number of operational pending balls at the time of the prefetch judgment (the number of active pending balls including the active pending ball that occurred this time) A identifiable "holding addition command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (see step S323 in FIG. 11 described later). Specifically, this look-ahead determination information is the result of a jackpot lottery (big hit lottery result at the start of fluctuation) or the Refers to game information obtained when the time fluctuation pattern is determined in advance. Therefore, this look-ahead determination information includes at least the look-ahead determination result (pre-read win-lose result) information of the win-lose lottery result at the start of the fluctuation, and in addition, the look-ahead determination result (look-ahead pattern result) information of the symbol lottery result, and the fluctuation Prefetch determination result (prefetch fluctuation pattern) information regarding the fluctuation pattern at the start can be included. What kind of information is included in the pending addition command to be sent to the effect control unit 24 can be determined as appropriate according to the content of the notice to be notified. For example, the "prediction variation pattern" obtained by the look-ahead determination when the operation reserve ball is generated does not necessarily have to be the "variation pattern at the start of fluctuation" itself obtained when the operation reserve ball is subjected to the variable display operation. . For example, in the case of a variation pattern that specifies "N reach 1" at the start of variation, the content specified by the look-ahead variation pattern is not the reach type itself of "N reach 1", but the skeleton "N reach Species (N reach 1 or N reach 2)" may be specified.

When the effect control unit 24 receives the pending addition command, based on the prefetch determination information included therein, as a part of the display control process related to the pending display, effect control processing relating to "prefetching notice" is performed. Specifically, based on the information included in the reserved addition command, a pre-reading notice lottery is performed to determine whether or not the pre-reading notice can be executed, and if the lottery is won, the presentation scenario of the pre-reading notice is determined. Then, according to the scenario, a pre-reading notice corresponding to the degree of expectation of winning is displayed. The odds of winning the pre-reading advance notice lottery are higher for "big win" than for "losing", and for reach types with relatively high winning expectations. Therefore, the winning expectation is indicated by whether or not the pre-reading notice is generated.

In this embodiment, when the pre-reading notice lottery is won, the pending icons of the pending display parts a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 (for example, the icon shown in note 3 in FIG. 29 described later, the alien icon shown in FIG. 32, etc. ), the hold icon that is the target of the pre-reading notice is, for example, from the white of the normal hold display (normal hold display mode) to the special hold colors and colors of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors of the notice display Pre-reading notice (hereinafter referred to as "hold change notice") of "hold change system" that changes to the hold display (special hold display mode) with is performed. FIG. 5 shows an example in which the operation holding ball of the hatched holding display portion b1 has changed to a special holding display. Here, the display of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors of the pending icon means that the winning expectation is high in the order of these colors. It is a premium pending icon (this secure pending notice). Therefore, this suspension display portion works as a suspension display means for displaying the number of suspension operations. However, when the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed, the holding display mode of the corresponding one of the holding display sections a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 is changed to a predetermined pre-reading notice display mode (special reservation display mode). This works as a means for generating a look-ahead foretelling effect. If a pre-reading notice occurs, if a high-expectation notice with a relatively high winning expectation (such as a high number of pseudo-runs or SP reach) occurs during the pattern variation display game targeting the ball that has been activated, the pre-reading will occur. Combined with the contents of the notice effect, the expectation of winning will be further increased.

The existing operation pending balls are sequentially digested with the execution of the symbol variation display game as a trigger. At this time, in order to express that one operation reserve ball has been consumed, the display position of the reservation display part corresponding to the existing operation reserve ball is moved up (sequentially shifted to the left), and the display number is reduced. Although control (shift display) is performed, the above-described special hold display continues to be displayed continuously while changing the display position of the hold display during this period. It should be noted that the special pending display is not limited to the case of appearing in the wake of winning a prize, but the normal pending display at the time of winning a prize is changed from the normal pending display to the special pending display at a predetermined timing such as the shift display, It is possible to change the current special hold display to a special hold display with a relatively higher winning expectation (for example, change from blue to yellow or higher hold color). Further, when the pending game K is placed on the receiving seat J, basically, the same display mode as the pending display mode in the pending display areas 76 and 77 is maintained, and the pattern variation display game of this time is maintained. A player can be notified of a pre-reading notice (special reservation display) for such operation-reserved balls even during the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a pre-reading notice different from the pending change notice, the above-mentioned "pre-reading notice during symbol change" (hereinafter referred to as "pre-reading notice during fluctuation") can appear. This predictive prediction during fluctuation can be executed in one or a plurality of times of the symbol change display game, and is, for example, a predictive prediction that can be executed singly or continuously. When a game ball wins a prize in a starting hole and a starting condition is established, the pre-forecast notice during fluctuation temporarily retains and stores the right to execute the symbol fluctuation display game related to the establishment of the start condition, and executes a lottery for pre-read notice during fluctuation. (In this embodiment, a lottery independent from the execution lottery of the pending change notice) is performed. When executing the predictive notice during fluctuation (when winning the lottery), if there are multiple active pending balls (holding memory) existing at that time, all or part of them The symbol change display related to the holding memory It is executed in the game (the symbol variation display game related to the operation pending ball that is the object of the lottery this time may be excluded), and the more the foreseeing notice is continuously executed, the higher the expectation of winning. For example, if the 4th active pending ball is the lottery target this time, the 1st to 3rd active pending balls stored in chronological order will be displayed in the symbol variation display game. When provided, one or a plurality of performance means are used to produce a dedicated performance during the pattern variation display game. In this case, the winning expectation is the highest when the predictive notice during fluctuation is continuously executed (three consecutive executions) for the first to third operation-reserving balls. The rendering means used for the predictive notice during fluctuation and the content of the rendering can be appropriately determined. For example, in the case of image display, a combination of background display and decorative patterns may be used, and dedicated sound presentation, light presentation, or movable body presentation may be combined with this image display. Note that the execution lottery for the pending change notice and the execution lottery for the prefetching notice during fluctuation are separate lotteries. Therefore, there are cases where pending change notice and/or changing lookahead notice occur.

In addition, in the lower right corner of the liquid crystal screen shown in FIG. There is provided a sub-display area 79 that can display information on the number of normal-map operation pending balls, information on the variable display operation of the special-maps 1 and 2, and information on the variable display operation of the normal-map. The information of this sub-display area 79 continues to be displayed even when the display of the decorative pattern is hidden during the announcement effect. Therefore, it is possible to identify from the information in the sub-display area 79 whether or not the symbol variation display game is currently being performed.

(4-2-6. Setting Suggestion Effect)
Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to present an effect mode (setting suggesting effect) that suggests information about the "set value". For example, it is a setting suggestion production such as the following (a) to (b).
(a) "Low setting suggestion effect" that suggests a low setting range (settings 1 to 3, 1 to 2, 2 to 3, etc.).
(k) A "high setting suggestion effect" that suggests a high setting range (settings 4 to 6, 4 to 5, 5 to 6, etc.).
(g) "Even number setting suggestion effect" to suggest even number setting (settings 2, 4, 6).
(U) "Odd number setting suggestion effect" to suggest odd number setting (settings 1, 3, 5).
(m) "Specific setting confirmation effect" for deterministically notifying a specific setting value (any of settings 1 to 6). For example, a "setting N confirmation effect" for deterministically informing "setting N". However, it is not preferable to inform the internal setting values definitely. The reason for this is that, like confirmation of setting 1 and setting 2, anything that definitely suggests a low setting region reduces the player's desire to play. Therefore, it is preferable to let one of the settings 4 to 6 of the high setting area be notified definitely. In particular, if a specific setting confirmation effect appears in which a high setting such as setting 5 confirmation or setting 6 confirmation appears, the player's willingness to play can be improved.
(m) "Specific setting denial effect" for deterministically notifying that the specified setting value (any of settings 1 to 6 is acceptable).
(H) "Specific range suggestive effect" that suggests a set value in a specific range. For example, suggesting settings 3 to 5 (α ≤ setting value ≤ β), suggesting settings 4 or more (α ≤ setting value), suggesting multiple specific values of "settings 1, 3, 5, 6", etc. . In addition, by varying the appearance rate according to the set value, for example, setting 1 is difficult to appear, setting 4 is moderately appearing, setting 6 is easy to appear, suggesting a high/low possibility of a certain set value. It is possible to

Such a setting suggestion effect can be displayed at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display game, for example, combined with or independently of the advance notice effect. For example, an item or character corresponding to the setting value is made to appear. Further, by setting the appearance rate of a specific advance notice effect according to the set value, the notice effect itself can be made to function as a "setting suggestion effect". For example, by changing the appearance rate of a specific SP reach, a specific number of pseudo-runs, a specific player participation type effect, a specific pre-reading notice, etc. according to the set value, the notice effect itself can be used as a setting suggestion effect. By making it work, it is possible to give the player an element of guessing the set value. For example, if SP reach C is likely to appear at the time of loss, the high setting is rich, and in the case of losing, the pseudo consecutive 4 fluctuations (3 pseudo fluctuations + main fluctuation) are likely to appear. High setting is rich, specific button operation production appears, it is "suggestion of setting 6 confirmation" or the like. In addition, the setting suggesting effect is not limited to the pattern variation display game, but is also displayed during the jackpot game, the "demo start waiting effect" and the "customer waiting effect (demonstration screen)", which will be described later, while waiting for the start of the game. Is possible. Also, the appearance rate (execution probability) of the setting suggestion effect can be appropriately determined according to the set value. For example, it may be determined such that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect decreases as the set value is relatively low.

<6. Directing means>
Various effects in the game machine 1 are produced by effect means provided in the game machine. Such directing means may be stimulus transmission means capable of exhibiting directing effects by appealing to human perception such as visual, auditory, and tactile sensations, and light generating means such as decorative lamps 45 and LED devices (light directing means). ), a sound generating device (sound effect means) such as a speaker 46, an effect display device (display means) such as a liquid crystal display device 36, a pressurizing device for transmitting contact pressure to the body of the operator, and a vibrating device for vibrating the player. Typical examples are a wind pressure device that applies wind pressure to the player's body (for example, the shooting operation handle 15 shakes), and a movable accessory that exerts a visual performance effect by its action. Here, the effect display device is a display device that appeals to the sense of sight like the image display device (image display means), but differs from the image display device in that it also includes devices that do not depend on images (for example, a 7-segment display device). When it is called an image display device, it mainly refers to a type that produces an effect (image display effect) by displaying an image. contained within.

<7. Game mode transition form: Fig. 6, Fig. 7>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7, the contents of the "game mode" related to the variation pattern selection mode and transition control between each game mode (between each game state) will be described. 6 and 7 are game flows showing outlines of game modes and production modes related thereto.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, a plurality of game modes such as general, omen, ceiling, heaven, and ST (ST beginning, ST middle, ST end) are provided. The progress of the game is controlled under the mode.

(About 7-1A. “Normal mode”)
The normal mode is a game mode in which the internal game state is related to the normal state, and this normal mode is an initial state that is started when the RAM is cleared (for example, when the RAM is cleared, when the settings are changed, etc.). It is a game mode of.

The normal mode includes a "general mode" with a variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) of "00H" and a "precursor mode" with a "01H". "General mode" is a game mode in which you can stay the longest while the game is in progress. will be

(7-1A-1. About production in normal mode)
During the general mode, it is shifted to a "general production mode" that produces productions related to the general mode. The general production mode according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of general production modes. It is possible to switch to general production mode. In the case of this embodiment, as shown in the normal mode block frame of FIG. ” (player-selectable presentation mode) can be selected. However, what should not be confused is that these production modes are production modes under the same variation pattern selection mode (Tcode = 00H), and the player side can freely switch the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) itself. does not mean Therefore, depending on the difference between normal, simple, and premium modes, the effects that appear may differ, but the internally selected special pattern variation pattern (variation pattern distribution table) does not change, so the pattern variation display game The time (variation time of special symbols) itself does not change.

"Normal mode" is the default production mode, and "Simple mode" is a production mode in which the appearance rate of a specific announcement production is lower than in normal mode or does not appear at all (appearance rate 0%). (specific notice effect appearance rate change mode).
In "simple mode", for example, (a) the appearance rate of a specific high-expectation announcement with a relatively high winning expectation (for example, winning expectation of 30% or more in normal mode) is higher than normal mode. The probability is low, and when the specific high-expectation notice appears, the winning expectation is greatly increased, and the excitement at the appearance of the high-expectation notice is increased. In addition, (b) the appearance rate of a specific low-expectation notice with a relatively low winning expectation (for example, a performance with a winning expectation of less than 30% in normal mode, a pre-reading notice) has a lower probability than normal mode (0% ), which is suitable for players who like simple effects with little excessive excitement (effects at the time of failure). In addition, (C) the appearance rate of player participation type effects is lower than in normal mode (including 0%), and the appearance rate of effects involving operation of the effect button is low, so calm games are preferred games. It is suitable for
In "Premium Mode", the appearance rate of the winning performance (a rich performance of winning the jackpot (for example, the expectation of winning is 90% or more) or the performance of confirming the winning of the jackpot) is higher than normal mode and simple mode. The appearance rate of a plurality of types of specific low-expectation-level announcements has a low probability (including 0%). Therefore, this production mode is suitable for players who want to enjoy the appearance of a premium production that predicts the accuracy.
The appearance rate of setting suggestion effects may be set to the same probability in any of the normal, simple, and premium effect modes, or may be different.

In addition, in each production mode of normal, simple, and premium, since it is possible to identify which mode it is in, a unique production corresponding to each production mode is displayed. Specifically, image display effects (for example, background images (background display), characters appearing in advance notice, or decorative patterns, etc.), sound effects (for example, BGM, sound effects), and light effects (for example, specific At least one of the lighting mode of the LED for effect) changes corresponding to each effect mode. This makes it possible to identify which of the normal/simple/premium production modes is being used. In this embodiment, in the general mode, the "daytime background image" with the sun shining is used as a base, and in the "normal mode", a background image reminiscent of the season 'spring' (for example, a background image containing a cherry tree), " A background image reminiscent of the season 'summer' in "simple mode" (for example, a background image containing the sea and sandy beach), a background image reminiscent of the season 'autumn' in 'premium mode' (for example, a background containing mountains and trees in autumn colors) image), etc., are controlled to switch to a background display (background effect) corresponding to at least each effect mode. In addition, under other game modes, it is possible to switch between at least two production modes of normal, simple and premium modes. Also in this case, as described above, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which it is possible to visually identify which mode it is in.

(7-1B. Premonition mode)
Also, the above-mentioned "prediction mode" is a game mode that is shifted to near the arrival of the "ceiling (relief function)" described later, for example, the "prediction effect" that informs that the ceiling is approaching is executed. It is provided as a game mode for. This portent mode is shifted to when a predetermined number of games (predetermined number of fluctuations) is reached without winning a jackpot in the normal mode (normal state). In the case of this embodiment, when 989 games are played in the normal mode, the game is shifted to the precursor mode from the 990th game (see the block frame (α) of the "precursor mode" in FIG. 7). Details of the "ceiling" will be described later, but in the present embodiment, when 1000 games (1000 spins) are addicted (continue losing) during the normal mode (at least when the internal game state is normal), the ceiling function is activated, A special profit (ceiling privilege) is given (see column of example of ceiling privilege in Remark 2 of FIG. 7).

(7-1B-1. Regarding production during omen mode)
During the omen mode, a transition is made to an "omen production mode" that produces an production (omen production) related to the omen mode. During the omen production mode, the "daytime background image" of the sun shining in the normal mode is switched to the "night background image" of the stars shining, and the omen mode is notified. In addition, even during the omen effect mode, it is possible to switch to any of the normal/simple/premium mode (see the omen mode block frame (γ) in FIG. 7). Also, during the omen effect mode, for example, a countdown display appears as an effect (residual ceiling number display effect) that can identify the number of remaining games (number of remaining ceilings) until the ceiling is reached (the omen mode in FIG. 7). See block frame (δ)). This remaining ceiling number display effect may appear during a part of the period during the omen mode. For example, the remaining ceiling number display effect may start (countdown display starts) from the 996th game when the ceiling is near. For example, considering the maximum number of reserved memories of 4, a countdown display (eg, suggesting a count of zero in the ceiling game) can be made between the 996th game and the 999th game, or between the 995th and 1000th game including the ceiling game. If the number of games up to the ceiling is known, there is a performance advantage that the player can prevent wasteful beating until reaching the ceiling.

In addition, during the indication production mode, at least a suspension display mode (suspension icon) different from that in the general mode appears. For example, in the general production mode, the pending display mode is based on the simple "round icon" shown in FIG. (Block frame (ε) of precursor mode in FIG. 7, see FIG. 32). In addition, in the general mode, one or more pending displays that exist immediately before the transition to the omen mode (989th game) will all change to a dedicated pending display (character icon) after the transition to the omen mode (990th game). Alternatively, only the pending display to be digested during the precursor mode may be changed to a dedicated pending display. To explain the latter configuration in detail, for example, in the case where there are three activated pending balls during the execution of the 988th game, the pending display related to the 989th game to the 991st game is indicated by a ``round icon (in normal mode). Suspension of digestion target: 989th game) ``Character icon (suspension of digestion target during precursor mode: 990th game)'' Character icon (suspension of digestion target during precursor mode: 991st game)''. In addition, from the start of the omen effect mode until the predetermined number of games is consumed, the same suspension display (round icon) as in the general effect mode is displayed, and the ceiling is near (for example, 996 game to 999 games), the display may be switched to a sign-only pending display (character icon). Further, during the portent effect mode, the above-mentioned "remaining ceiling count display effect" and/or "holding display dedicated to portents" may appear.

(Regarding selection of normal/simple/premium mode in Omen mode)
Although it has been described that it is possible to switch to any of the "normal/simple/premium mode" during the omen effect mode of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and the switching is not possible (under the non-switching state). control)). That is, during the sign effect mode, the effect mode selectable by the player can be fixed. For example, it can be fixed to the production mode selected in the general mode, or forced to be fixed to one of the normal/simple/premium modes (for example, the default normal mode). (The same applies to heaven mode, which will be described later). In this case, the fact that the effect mode, which was switchable in the general mode, cannot be switched can give the player a sense of incompatibility and let the player know that the game is about to reach the ceiling. In particular, when the omen production mode and the general production mode are in a hidden state for production (for example, the omen production mode and the general production mode are made a common background image, the production mode common to the omen mode and the general mode (Internally it is a sign mode, but the production mode is a general production mode), the sign mode itself is not provided, etc.). (Ceiling game) can be notified that it is approaching.

(7-2. About “ST mode”)
ST mode is a game mode in which the internal game state is related to the variable probability state (YJ = 01H), and in this ST mode, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is "02H""ST early stage mode" and ""03H""ST middle mode" and "04H""ST end mode" are included. This ST mode is shifted to when one of the probability variable jackpots 1 to 7 is won.

In the case of the present embodiment, depending on which one of the variable probability jackpots 1 to 7 is won, any of the "variable probability A" to "variable probability C" is shifted, so the mode of transition of the game mode is also different. More specifically, the following transition modes (A-1) to (A-3) are used.

(A-1: If you win a variable hit 3, 6 (5R variable ST25, 7R variable ST25) that gives a variable C (25 times of ST + 75 times of time saving))
When one of the variable probability jackpots 3 and 6 is won, the game is shifted to "variable probability C" as already explained in FIG. In this case, the transition form of the game mode is to stay in the "ST early stage mode" until the 1st to 25th games (the beginning of the ST number), and stay in the "time saving mode" until the 26th to 100th games (within the time saving number). It has become. Focusing on this series of transition modes of "ST early stage mode (ST25 times) ⇒ time-saving mode", the game mode that is shifted when the probability variable jackpot 3, 6 is won is also called "ST25 mode" (see FIG. 4).

(A-2: If you win the probability variation jackpot 2, 5 (5R probability variation ST75, 7R probability variation ST75) that gives probability variation B (75 times of ST + 25 times of time saving))
When one of the probability variable jackpots 2 and 5 is won, the game is shifted to the above-mentioned "probability variable B", and "ST number 75 times + time saving number 25 times" is given (see FIG. 4). Therefore, the transition mode of the game mode in this case is to stay in the "ST early stage mode" until the 1st to 25th games (early stage within the ST number), and to "ST middle stage mode" until the 26th to 75th games (middle stage within the ST number). , and stays in the “time-saving mode” from the 76th to the 100th game (within the number of times of time-saving). Focusing on this series of transition forms of "ST early stage mode (ST 25 times) ⇒ ST middle stage mode (ST 50 times) ⇒ time saving mode", the game mode that is shifted when the probability variable jackpot 2, 5 is won is also called "ST 75 mode". (See Figure 4).

(A-3. If you win the probability variation jackpot 1, 3, 7 (5R probability variation ST100), 10R probability variation ST100, special 7R probability variation) that gives probability variation A (ST number of 100 times))
When one of the probability variable jackpots 1, 3, and 7 is won, the game is shifted to the above-mentioned "probability variable A", and "ST number 100 times" is given (see FIG. 4). Therefore, the transition mode of the game mode in this case is to stay in the "ST early stage mode" until the 1st to 25th games (early stage within the ST number), and to "ST middle stage mode" until the 26th to 75th games (middle stage within the ST number). , and stay in the "ST endgame mode" from the 76th to the 100th game (the endgame in the number of STs). Focusing on this series of transition forms of "ST early stage mode (ST 25 times) ⇒ ST middle stage mode (ST 75 times) ⇒ ST final stage mode (ST 25 times)", the game mode that is shifted when the probability variable jackpot 1, 3, 7 is won is also called "ST100 mode" (see FIG. 4).

(B. Continuous performance of variable A to variable C (ST25, ST75, ST100 mode))
Since the "ST number" differs depending on which of the above-mentioned variable jackpots 1 to 7 is won, that is, whether it is shifted to one of "variable A to variable C", in the state with electric support in variable A to variable C ( Probability variable state or time saving state) jackpot pullback rate (so-called "Renzo rate") is also different. That is, the degree of advantage to the player (the state of profit (degree of profit) given to the player) is different. For example, in the case of setting 6 (1/189 at low probability, 1/63 at high probability), the probability variable A (ST number of 100 times) consecutive rate, that is, the ST intermediate rate is about 79.8% . In addition, the probability variable B ("ST number 75 times + time reduction number 25 times" electric sapo 100 times) has a continuous rate of about 70% for the ST rate, and about 12.4% for the short time rate. Overall (75 times of ST + 25 times of time saving), the rate of consecutive houses is about 73.6%. In addition, the probability variable C (100 electric sapo with “25 times of ST + 75 times of time saving”) has a continuous rate of about 33% for the ST rate, about 32.8% for the short time rate, The overall rate of consecutive residences (with power sapo) is about 55%. In addition, the continuous rate in the case of the time-saving jackpot (time-saving medium rate) is about 41.2%.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since a plurality of probability variable jackpots with different numbers of STs are provided, the degree of consecutive wins during the ST can be varied according to the type of jackpot won. In particular, as in the present embodiment, when the number of times of the state with electric support (electric support number) is the same (for example, 100 times), but the number of STs is different (for example, ST 25 times, ST 75 times, ST 100 times), The degree of profit and the degree of continuous ownership in the state with an electric support can be greatly varied according to the winning jackpot type. As a result, the degree of freedom in game play is increased, and the amusement of the game can be further improved. In addition, the degree of freedom of the production (ST production mode, which will be described later) related to the ST mode is also improved, and the production can be diversified.

(7-2-1. Fluctuations at the beginning of ST, middle of ST, and end of ST)
As already described, the "ST early stage mode", the "ST middle stage mode", and the "ST final stage mode" have different variation pattern selection modes (Tcode) (see FIG. 28). As a result, it is possible to select a variation pattern distribution table (see FIGS. 25 and 27) corresponding to each ST mode, so that each ST mode can create its own characteristic ST mode. For example, in the variation pattern distribution table for ST early stage mode, a variation pattern with a variation time of 2 seconds is selected with a high probability, and in the variation pattern distribution table for ST middle mode, a variation pattern with a variation time of 3 seconds is high. It is selected with a probability, and in the variation pattern distribution table of the ST final stage mode, the variation pattern with a variation time of 4 seconds is selected with a high probability, and the average variation time (variation pattern variation time), in other words, the average execution time of the symbol variation display game (average execution time of the symbol variation display game per game or the number of symbol variation display games executed per unit time: hereinafter, “average (also referred to as "digestion time") can be slowed down. It should be noted that the average duration of the pattern variation display game (average duration) is at least the average duration at the time of losing, that is, the "average variation time of the losing variation pattern" in each ST mode.

In the case of this embodiment, the relationship of the average digestion times in the ST mode is determined so as to satisfy "ST end mode<ST middle mode<ST early stage mode" (see FIG. 27). That is, the ST early stage mode is "high speed fluctuation state (fastest in all game modes (shortest average digestion time))", the ST middle stage mode is "medium speed fluctuation state", and the ST end mode is controlled under "low speed fluctuation state". . If the average digestion time (digestion speed) in each mode satisfies the relationship of "ST end mode<ST middle mode<ST early stage mode", the time is not particularly limited. However, the ST mode is a game mode related to the variable state, and during the ST mode, the "special symbol time saving function" works, so any variation state is at least normal mode (normal state) than the symbol variation display game. The average digestion time is short. Each of the above fluctuation states (high speed, medium speed and low speed fluctuation states) has the following characteristics.

The above-mentioned "high-speed fluctuation state" is mainly useful in a game mode (game state) in which emphasis is placed on game characteristics, such as "increase the average speed of the game to increase the time efficiency of the progress of the game". During the ST mode (variable state), it becomes "state with electric sapo + high probability state (special pattern variable function activated) + special symbol time-saving state (special symbol time-saving function activated)", and at least compared to the normal mode, the symbol variation display game The average digestion time of the game is relatively short, and the game state is devised to make it easier to win a big hit. There are many players who want to get a big hit as soon as possible. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of the ST early stage mode, a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time is likely to be selected to generate a "high-speed variation state".

On the other hand, in the "medium-speed fluctuation state" or "low-speed fluctuation state" in which a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time is likely to be selected as compared with the "high-speed fluctuation state", the average pattern fluctuation display game Although the digestion time is longer than that of the "high-speed fluctuation state", the performance time can be set longer, which is useful in a game mode emphasizing the playability such as "enjoying the performance".

(7-2-2. Regarding effects during ST mode)
The ST mode according to the present embodiment includes the "ST early stage mode", the "ST middle stage mode", and the "ST final stage mode" as described above. Therefore, as production modes (ST production mode) corresponding to these ST modes, "ST early stage production mode" in which production (production for ST early stage) related to "ST early stage" appears, and "ST early stage production mode" related to "ST middle stage""ST middle stage effect mode" in which the effect (ST middle stage effect) appears, and "ST end stage effect mode" in which the effect (ST end stage effect) related to "ST end stage" appears. ing.

(7-2-3. Example of production in ST mode: Fig. 29)
FIG. 29 shows examples of effects in the ST opening stage effect mode, ST middle stage effect mode and ST end stage effect mode.

Referring to FIG. 29, the "ST early stages production mode" according to the present embodiment is an "underwater acoustic warfare mode" that produces a production expressing a battle between submarines, and the "ST middle stage production mode" represents a battle between fleets. The "surface battle mode" and the "ST final stage production mode", which produce an expressive production, are the "land battle mode", which produces a production that expresses the battle between tanks. In other words, the ST mode period is divided into three stages of the ST beginning stage, the ST middle stage, and the ST end stage according to the number of remaining STs. In addition, the player is informed of the dynamic change of the fluctuation pattern (change of fluctuation state such as high speed, medium speed, and low speed) and accompanying effects (switching of background effects, advance notice effects, etc.). It should be noted that the display of "Right shot ⇒" shown in the figure is a launch guidance notification effect (right stroke instruction effect) that urges the player to hit right. Further, the reserved icon is shown only in the example of presentation (example of presentation relating to the ST100 mode) in FIG.

Regarding the "ST division effect" that divides the effect mode during the ST period, in each effect mode of "ST early stage effect mode", "ST middle stage effect mode", "ST final stage effect mode", underwater sound warfare mode , a surface combat mode, a land combat mode, etc., and thereby, it is informed that the number of STs is gradually approaching the final one.

In this embodiment, even if any of the probability variable jackpots 1 to 7 is won, the production mode is started from the "underwater sound warfare mode" of the ST early stage production mode. That is, the ST opening production mode (underwater acoustic warfare mode) is common to each ST mode (ST25, ST75, ST100 mode) as shown. However, each ST mode differs in the transition form of game mode, and the transition form of production mode also differs accordingly.

(In case of ST25 mode: Fig. 29 (C))
In the case of ST25 mode (25 times of ST + 75 times of time reduction), as shown in FIG. Then, when the 25th game of the final ST is finished, the game mode is shifted from the ST early stage mode to the time saving mode, and along with this, the production mode is also changed from the ST early stage production mode (underwater sound battle mode) to the time saving production mode (fighters between fighters). (The details of the time-saving mode and time-saving production mode will be described later). This time-saving production mode (air combat mode) stays for 26 games to 100 games (time-saving final game). Although not shown, when the 100th game is finished, the time saving mode ends (the state with the electric sapo ends) and shifts to the normal mode. (General production mode) (similarly to ST75 mode, which will be described later).

(For ST75 mode: Fig. 29 (b))
In the case of ST75 mode (75 times of ST + 25 times of time saving), as shown in FIG. 29(b), between 1st and 25th games, stay in ST early stages production mode (underwater sound warfare mode). When the 25th game ends, the game mode is shifted from the ST early stage mode to the ST middle stage mode, and along with this, the production mode is also shifted from the ST early stage production mode (underwater acoustic battle mode) to the ST middle stage production mode (water battle mode). , and stays in this ST middle production mode (water battle mode) until the 75th game. And when the 75th game of the ST final is finished, the game mode is shifted from the ST middle stage mode to the time saving mode, and along with this, the production mode is also from the ST middle stage production mode (water battle mode) to the time saving production mode (air battle mode). migrated. In the case of the ST75 mode, this time-saving production mode (air combat mode) stays for 76 games to 100 games (time-saving final game).

(For ST100 mode: Fig. 29 (a))
In the case of the ST100 mode (100 times of ST), as shown in FIG. 29A, up to the 75th game, the same game mode and effect mode transition as the above-described ST75 mode. However, when the 75th game is finished, the game mode is shifted to the ST middle stage mode ST final stage mode, and along with this, the production mode and the production mode are changed from the ST middle stage production mode (water battle mode) to the ST final stage production mode (land battle mode). is transferred to In the case of the ST100 mode, all 100 games until the end of the state with the electric sapo are ST (probability variable), and this land battle mode is a special production mode that occurs only in the ST100 mode. In addition, in the case of ST100 mode, since the background is sequentially switched in all sections of ST mode, the player's sense of tension can be reduced to three different production modes: underwater acoustic battle (ST early stage), water battle (ST middle stage), and land battle. It gets stronger every time it switches to the mode (end of ST), and becomes strongest when it reaches the land battle mode at the end of ST. Although not shown, when the 100th game is finished, the ST mode ends (the state with the electric sapo ends) and shifts to the normal mode. Mode (general production mode).

As described above, in this embodiment, when any jackpot is won, the game is started from "ST early stage mode+ST early stage effect mode". That is, regardless of the transition destination game state of the big hit game (probability change A to probability change C), in other words, regardless of the initial remaining ST number (number of ST to be given), the start production mode after the big hit game (initial production mode) are common.

(Modifications related to ST mode: FIGS. 30 and 31)
It should be noted that the transition of the ST mode and the ST effect mode in the state of progress of the game is not limited to the above-described embodiment (FIG. 29), and can be configured to follow the transition shown in modified examples 1 and 2 below. Modifications 1 and 2 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. FIG.

(Modification 1 related to ST mode: FIG. 30)
FIG. 30 shows Modification 1 of the ST mode of this embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 30, the pending icon corresponding to the production mode is omitted (the same applies to FIG. 31 described later).

In the case of this example (modified example 1), the ST mode is divided into a plurality, but depending on each ST mode (depending on the jackpot type that was elected), the start production mode is different, and depending on the number of remaining ST , to start from different production modes.

Referring to FIG. 30, in the case of ST100 mode, as shown in FIG. 30(a), the same mode transition as in the above embodiment (FIG. 29(a)) is traced.

However, in the case of ST75 mode (75 times of ST + 25 times of time saving), focusing on the fact that the initial remaining number of STs is 75 times, as shown in the figure (b), the following mode transition ( ST mode, transition of the corresponding production mode) is to be traced.
"Between 1 to 25 games": "ST middle stage mode + ST middle stage production mode (water battle mode)"
"Between 26 and 75 games": "ST end mode + ST end stage production mode (land battle mode)"
“Between 76 to 100 games”: “Time saving mode + time saving production mode (air combat mode)”

In addition, in the case of ST25 mode (25 times of ST + 50 times of time saving), focusing on the fact that the initial remaining number of STs is 25 times, as shown in the figure (ha), the following mode transition It is designed to be traced.
"Between 1 to 25 games": "ST end mode + ST end stage production mode (land battle mode)"
“Between 26 and 100 games”: “Time-saving mode + Time-saving production mode (air combat mode)”

In this example, the "ST early stage mode" exists only in the ST100 mode, and the "ST middle stage mode" exists in the ST100 mode and the ST75 mode. The ST final stage mode exists in common in each ST mode. This example differs from the above-described embodiment in the following points.

In the case of this example, focusing on the fluctuation state, in the ST75 mode, the fluctuation state is started from the "medium speed fluctuation state" because the ST middle stage mode (surface warfare mode) is started. Further, in the ST25 mode, since the ST final stage mode (land battle mode) is started, the fluctuation state is started from the "low speed fluctuation state". That is, in the case of this example, as the number of STs in the initial stage is relatively small, the game mode is started from the game mode in which the average completion time of the symbol variation display game is slow. Therefore, the section corresponding to the "high speed fluctuation state" at the beginning of ST in the above embodiment (between 1 to 25 games) is a section of medium speed fluctuation state or low speed fluctuation state, so even if the number of ST is small , the ST period can be enjoyed for a long period of time without fear that the ST period will end quickly.

(Modification 2 related to ST mode: FIG. 31)
FIG. 31 shows Modified Example 2 of the ST effect mode according to the present embodiment. This example is started from a common "ST production mode" regardless of the number of times of ST, and when it is shifted to the time saving state, it is shifted to the "time saving mode". In the drawing, an example starting from the ST middle stage mode is representatively shown.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 31(a) to 31(b), ST25, ST75 and ST100 modes all have common ST mode and ST effect mode (naval warfare mode). That is, during the ST mode, the variation pattern selection mode is the same ("03H" in ST middle stage mode in this example), and at least the variation state (average digest time) does not change according to the remaining ST number. In this respect, it is significantly different from the above-described embodiment and Modification 1. However, in the case of ST25 mode or ST75 mode, when the number of ST ends, it is shifted from the ST mode to the time saving mode (variation pattern selection mode is updated to "05H" of the time saving mode), along with this production mode is also shifted from the ST middle stage production mode to the time reduction production mode. In other words, in the case of ST25 and ST75 mode, the game mode (variation pattern selection mode) in the state with electric support occurs, and in the case of ST100 mode, the game mode in the state with electric support (variation pattern selection mode ) does not occur.

In the case of this example, since the ST production mode (ST mode) does not change according to the number of ST, for example, the number of ST is relatively small such as "5 times, 10 times, 15 times" (low ST probability variable state) is suitable when a plurality of types of are provided. This is because when the number of times of ST is small, the player feels annoyed if the performance mode or the variation pattern selection mode is changed recklessly.

It should be noted that during the ST mode, the "normal mode", "simple mode", and "premium mode" explained in the normal mode may be configured to be unswitchable, or like the normal mode, the player may be configured to be switchable. (The same applies to other game modes (shorter working hours mode and heaven mode, which will be described later)). In the case of a switchable configuration, specific colors (for example, dark color), or change the display color and pattern of weapon images (submarines, ships, tanks, fighter planes (in the case of the time-saving production mode described later)) related to each ST mode to normal/simple/premium mode. By applying display processing such as changing in each production mode, it is possible to identify which production mode is being switched to. Also, how to determine the fluctuation state (average digestion time) in each mode is arbitrary. In the present embodiment, the relationship of "ST end mode < ST middle mode <ST early mode" was described, but it may be configured like the variation state of modifications 1 and 2, or "ST early mode < ST middle mode < ST end The relationship may be such that the fluctuation state relatively slows down according to the number of STs, like the relationship of "Mode".

The following (1) to (10) can be used for the "remaining ST number of times notification effect" for notifying the remaining ST number and the "remaining power supply number of times notification effect" for notifying the remaining number of power supply support.
(1) In each ST production mode (each ST mode), the "remaining ST number notification production" and/or the "remaining electricity sapo number notification production" can appear.
In addition, (2) when displaying the remaining ST number informing effect, the remaining ST number of each effect ST mode may be notified. For example, if it is in ST early stage mode, the countdown display is performed from the remaining 25 times, if it is in the ST middle stage mode, the countdown display is performed from the remaining 50 times, and if it is in the ST final stage mode, the countdown display is performed from the remaining 25 times. and so on.
Further, (3) a configuration in which the remaining ST number informing effect is not displayed (a configuration in which the remaining ST number cannot be grasped) may be adopted. In this case, only the residual electric power support number informing effect may be displayed.
Also, (4) the remaining ST count notification effect may be started after a predetermined number of games have elapsed from the start of the ST. For example, the countdown display may be started five games before the end of the ST.
Also, (5) the remaining ST number informing effect may appear only in a specific ST mode. The specific ST mode may be any of ST25, ST75, and ST100, but as the number of remaining STs increases, the player tends to enjoy the game while paying attention to the number of STs. It is preferable to make it appear.
Also, (6) during the ST performance mode (ST mode), the remaining ST number of times notification effect may be displayed, and during the time reduction performance mode (time reduction mode), the remaining power supply number of times notification effect may be displayed.
Further, (7) the remaining ST number of times notification effect and the remaining electric power sapo number of times notification effect may not be separately displayed, but may be used as a countdown display, for example. For example, using the same countdown display, the number display is "white" during ST mode and "red" during time saving mode, or a predetermined effect image (( For example, display with light (glow effect, shadow effect, gradation, blur, embossing, etc.), but no effect during time-saving mode.

(7-3. About “time saving mode”)
Returning to the description of FIG. The time saving mode is a game mode in which the internal game state is related to the time saving state (YJ=02H), and in the case of this embodiment, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is one type of "05H". In the time-saving mode, in addition to winning time-saving jackpots 1 and 2 (5R time-saving A, 5R time-saving B), variable hits 2, 3, 5, and 6 (5R variable ST75, 5R variable ST25, 7R variable ST75, 7R variable This is a game mode that is shifted even after the number of times of ST is completed when ST25) or the like is won. After the end of the time saving mode (after the end of the time saving number of times), it is shifted to the "normal mode" (see the upward bold arrow in the block frame of the time saving mode in FIG. 6).

(7-3-1. Regarding the fluctuation state during the time saving mode)
During the time-saving mode, it becomes "low probability (special symbol probability variation function not activated) + electric sapo state + special symbol time-saving state", but regarding the average digestion time of the symbol variation display game, the high speed related to the ST mode It is free to select a variable state that is the same as or substantially the same as the variable state, medium-speed variable state, or low-speed variable state, or a variable state that has a different average digestion rate. However, in the time saving mode, it is also transferred from ST mode, specifically, in the case of ST25 mode, it transfers from "ST early stage mode (high speed fluctuation state)" to "time saving mode", and in the case of ST75 mode is the point of transitioning to "short time mode" through "ST early stage mode (high speed fluctuation state)" and "ST middle stage mode (medium speed fluctuation state)", and the point that the probability of a big hit lottery is low during the short time mode (losing In view of the frequent occurrence of ), it is preferable to position the time-saving mode as a game mode that emphasizes game characteristics such as "enjoying production". Therefore, it is preferable to set the fluctuation state (average digestion time) during the time saving mode to "the fluctuation state during the time saving mode < the high speed fluctuation state during the ST mode", more preferably "the fluctuation state during the time saving mode ≤ during the ST mode medium-speed fluctuation state of In addition, like the ST mode, the time saving mode may be configured so that a plurality of time saving modes can be shifted, and in this case, a plurality of variation pattern selection modes for the time saving mode may be provided.

(7-3-2. About production during time saving mode)
During the time saving mode, it is shifted to the "time saving production mode" in which the production related to "during the time saving state" appears. In the time-saving production mode, it becomes an "air battle mode" that produces a production that expresses the battle between fighters, and is distinguished from each game mode (ST early stage, ST middle stage, ST final stage mode) in the above ST mode. In this embodiment, in addition to the case of winning the time-saving jackpots 1 and 2, even when shifting to the time-saving mode after the ST of the probability variable jackpots 2, 3, 5, and 6 is completed, all are shifted to the same time-saving performance mode. , the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the time saving jackpot 1 and the time saving jackpot 2 may be shifted to a time saving production mode (for example, when the time saving jackpot 1 is won, the time saving A production mode is won, and when the time saving jackpot 2 is won, the time saving B production mode is performed). . In addition, the time-saving performance mode at the time of winning the time-saving jackpot and the time-saving performance mode (time-saving performance mode related to ST25 and ST75) after the end of the ST at the time of winning the probability variable jackpot may be different.

(7-4. "Ceiling mode": Figure 7)
Next, the "ceiling mode" will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, a "ceiling function" is provided as a relief function in the event of a serious addiction. This ceiling function is a function of providing a predetermined profit state (ceiling privilege) to save the player when a predetermined number of games (predetermined number of fluctuations) is reached without winning the jackpot. The ceiling privilege is provided with a profit state that is at least more advantageous than the normal state in terms of the hamari relief function. The number of ceiling games in this embodiment is the number of games (number of ceiling games) considering the jackpot lottery probability at low probability of setting 1 to 6, and is the 1000th game in normal mode (three times the low probability). ~4 times), and the ceiling mode is a game mode that occurs in the 1000th game. It should be noted that the number of ceiling games can be determined as appropriate. For example, if the jackpot lottery probability in the normal state is a relatively high probability (around 1/100) of the "sweet digital type", the ceiling number of games can be about 300 to 500 games. In this embodiment, the number of ceiling games is the same regardless of the setting value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ceiling game can be different for all or part of each setting value. For example, settings 1 to 6 each have a different number of ceiling games (for example, 1100 games to 1050 games: the higher the setting value, the smaller the number of ceiling games), and the high setting area (settings 4 to 6) sets the number of ceiling games to 1000. As a game, the middle and low setting areas (settings 1 to 3) can be 1032 games, or only a specific setting value (for example, the highest setting setting 6) can be the number of ceiling games different from other setting values.

First, the types of ceiling benefits will be explained. As the types of ceiling benefits, as shown in the list of "Examples of ceiling benefits" in Note 2 of FIG. Infinite Potential", "Limited Potential", and "Forced Hit". If you broadly classify these benefits, “Infinite time saving” and “Limited time saving” are “Ceiling time saving type”, “Infinite probability change” and “Limited probability change” are “Ceiling probability change type”, “Infinite potential” and “Limited potential Accurate" is a ceiling privilege belonging to the "ceiling latent certainty type", and "forced hit" belongs to the "ceiling hit type". These ceiling privilege types will be sequentially described below.

(Infinite reduction of working hours)
(A) “Infinite reduction in working hours” is a benefit that gives a reduction in working hours until the next big hit. In addition, in the case of infinite time saving, the number of times of time saving is "no number limit (infinite)", but the number of time saving times that will be substantially until the next big hit, such as 10000 times or 65536 times, etc. Even if there is no possibility of ending the time-saving state (when it is safe to consider it to be 0%), or when giving an undigestible number of time-savings during the business hours of the pachinko hall (for example, 65536 times, etc.), In the present invention, it can be treated as belonging to infinite time reduction.

(limited working hours)
(B) "Limited time saving" is to provide a time saving state within a predetermined number of times of time saving so as to achieve an appropriate jackpot winning rate. In this respect, it differs from the above-mentioned infinite reduction of working hours, which does not have a limited number of times. As the number of times of time saving to be given, for example, the same number of times of time saving 100 times or 75 times of time saving times as the time saving jackpots 1 and 2 are typical examples, but not limited to giving the same number of time saving times as the time saving jackpots, different time saving times A number of times (for example, 75 times, 150 times, 200 times, etc.) can be given. In addition, even if the number of times of time reduction that becomes "substantially until the next big hit" in the above "infinite time reduction" is given, it can be said that it belongs to this limited time reduction in that there is a limit on the number of times, but as described above, the present invention can be treated as belonging to infinite time reduction.

(Specific example of giving finite time reduction)
Here, when giving a finite time saving, it can be the following giving forms (1) to (4) (finite time saving giving forms 1 to 4).

(Limited time saving form 1)
(1) There are multiple types (number of types A) of the number of times of time reduction due to the jackpot (number of times of time reduction given due to winning the jackpot (time reduction state)), but the number of times of time reduction due to ceiling benefits (time reduction state) is more than that. Decide on a small number of types (number of types B). Specifically, it is configured so as to satisfy the relationship "the number of types B<the number of types A".

In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, there are two types (number of types A) of 100 times (time saving A) and 50 times (time saving B) for the number of times of time saving due to the big hit, but in the ceiling privilege, for example, the ceiling privilege Then, it is configured to give only one type of time saving number of times 100 times (time saving A). In addition, if the relationship of "the number of types B<the number of types A" is satisfied, the number of times of time saving (for example, 150 times) different from the number of times of time saving due to the big hit may be given. In addition, if there are two or more types of the number of times of reduced working hours (time saving state) due to the ceiling privilege (in the case of "2 ≤ number of types B < number of types A"), one of the number of time saving times (time saving state ) can be configured to be determinable.

(Limited time saving form 2)
(2) If there are multiple types of the number of times of time saving (time saving state) by the ceiling privilege, one of the number of times of time saving (time saving state) is determined by a predetermined lottery (ceiling privilege lottery).
For example, it can be determined by lottery from among a plurality of times of time saving (50 times and 100 times in the present embodiment) given due to the winning of the jackpot. In this case, the number of time reductions equivalent to the jackpot can be given. Of course, it may be determined by lottery from among a plurality of times of time saving (for example, 100 times, 75 times and 25 times) including times of time saving different from the number of times of time saving given due to the big hit. In this case, the number of time reductions different from the jackpot may be awarded. In addition, the lottery probability (selection rate) of the lottery target ceiling privilege type (here, each time saving number of times) may be the same or substantially the same, and all or part may be different. Also, the lottery targets may include "ceiling privilege lost" for which no ceiling privilege is given. When the ceiling privilege loss is included, even if the ceiling game is reached, the ceiling privilege is not necessarily given, but in this case, "execution of the ceiling privilege lottery" serves as a hamari relief function.

Moreover, you may determine the lottery probability according to a "setting value", and may determine the number of times of time saving (time saving state) by predetermined lottery (ceiling privilege lottery according to a setting value). For example, as the set value increases, a relatively large number of times of time saving (time saving state) is likely to be selected. In other words, as the set value increases, a privilege with a relatively high degree of profit is likely to be awarded (the same applies to other ceiling privileges described later). Specifically, when "100 times, 75 times, 50 times" are provided as the types of time saving, if the lottery probability is "setting 1", "25%, 35%, 40%", "setting For 6″, it is “45%, 30%, 25%” and so on. However, on the contrary, considering that the lower the set value is, the more addicted to it, the lower the set value, the more likely the number of time reductions to be selected. In other words, as the set value becomes lower, a privilege with a relatively high degree of profit is likely to be granted (the same applies to other ceiling privileges described later). Moreover, it is good also as a structure of "when a specific ceiling privilege is provided, a specific setting value is fixed." For example, when the number of times of time saving is given 25 times, it is "setting 6 fixed", and when 75 times is given, it is "setting 4 or more fixed". In this way, the ceiling privilege determination method related to the setting value can provide the player with useful information in the form of a setting guessing element, and is therefore useful in increasing the willingness of the player who encounters a addiction to play.

(Limited time saving form 3)
(3) When the average number of times of reduction of time is N due to the time reduction jackpot and the average number of times of reduction of time is M due to the ceiling privilege, it can be configured to satisfy the relationships of the following (formula 1) to (formula 3).
(Formula 1) Configured so as to satisfy the relationship of “average number of times of reduced working hours N<average number of reduced hours of working hours M”. In the case of the present embodiment, since the average number of times N of time saving due to the big hit is 75 times, the average number of times M of time saving due to the ceiling privilege is set to a number of times of time saving greater than this. In the case of this example, since the ceiling privilege is relatively higher in the degree of profit than the normal jackpot winning, it is a pleasant privilege for a player who is addicted to the game and has a significantly reduced desire to play. In addition, the average number of times of reduction of working hours M may be an infinite number of times. When the average number of times of shortening of working hours M is infinite, it is equivalent to the case of giving the above "infinite shortening of working hours".
(Formula 2) Configured so as to satisfy the relationship of "average number of times of reduced working hours N = average number of reduced hours of work M". In this case, the degree of profit from the big hit (the number of times of time reduction) and the degree of profit from the ceiling privilege are the same.
(Formula 3) Configured so as to satisfy the relationship of “average number of times of reduced working hours N>average number of reduced hours of working hours M”. In this case, the degree of profit from the big hit is relatively lower than the degree of profit from the ceiling privilege, and it is possible to prevent excessive awarding of the privilege.

(Limited time saving form 4)
(4) As with the above (Formula 3), focusing on the point of not giving excessive benefits, at least the number of time savings that satisfies the relationship of "number of times of time savings due to ceiling benefits ≤ maximum number of times of time savings due to big hits" is set. If it is this embodiment, the number of times of time saving by a ceiling privilege is below the number of times of time saving of "time saving A" by time saving big hit 1, for example, is 100 times, 90 times, etc. In addition, focusing on the minimum number of time-savings due to the big hit, it may be the number of times that satisfies the relationship of "minimum number of times of time-savings due to the big hit ≤ number of times of time-savings due to the ceiling privilege < maximum number of times of time-savings due to the big hit". In this embodiment, the number of times of time saving by the ceiling privilege is more than the number of times of saving time B by the time saving jackpot 2, less than the number of times of saving time of "time saving A" by the time saving jackpot 1, for example, 50 times, 60 times.

(Infinite variation)
(C) “Infinite probability variation” is a benefit that gives a probability variation state until the next big hit. In addition, in the case of infinite probability variation, the ST number is "no number limit (infinite)", but like the above "infinite short time" and the same event, the ST number (for example, 10000 times or 65536 times) may be given.

(finite variable)
(D) “Limited probability variation” is different from the above-mentioned infinite probability variation, and provides a probability variation state within a predetermined number of STs so as to achieve an appropriate jackpot winning rate. For example, 100 times, 75 times, or 25 times, etc. are given as the number of STs, like the probability variable jackpots 1 to 7. Of course, the number of times may not be the same as the number of STs of the probability variable jackpots 1 to 7, and 50 times, 150 times, etc. may be given. In addition, even if the number of STs that becomes "substantially until the next big hit" in the above "infinite probability variation" is given, it can be said that it belongs to this finite probability variation in that there is a limit on the number of times, but the same as the above "infinite time reduction" Like an elephant, it can be treated as belonging to infinite probability variation, or it can be treated as belonging to finite probability variation (the same applies to infinite probability described later).

(Specific example of giving finite probability variation)
Here, when granting a finite probability variation, the following ceiling privilege grant form (limited probability variation grant form) 1 ~ 4. In addition, in the following finite probability variable grant forms 1 to 4, the "time reduction number of times" explained in the above "finite time reduction grant form 1 to 4" was replaced with "ST number", and the "time reduction state" was appropriately read as "variable state". Since it is substantially the same as the content (concept), the content will be omitted as appropriate in order to avoid redundant description for convenience of explanation.

(Finite probability variation grant form 1)
(1) Number of STs due to a big hit (the number of STs (variable state) given due to winning a jackpot is of multiple types (number of types A), but the number of STs (variable state) due to ceiling benefits is less than that ( The number of types is B), that is, the configuration is made so as to satisfy the relationship of "the number of types B<the number of types A".

In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the number of STs (variable probability state) given due to winning the variable probability jackpot is 100 times (variable probability A), 75 times (variable probability B), 25 times (variable probability C ), for example, in the ceiling privilege, only one type of ST number of 100 times (probability variation A) is provided.

(Finite probability variation grant form 2)
(2) If there are multiple types of ST numbers (variable probability state) due to ceiling benefits, one of the ST numbers (variable probability state) is determined by a predetermined lottery. Regarding this point, it is substantially the same as the content of "time saving number" explained in "(limited time saving form 2)" in the above finite time saving as "ST number", "time saving state" to "variable state" etc. is.

(Limited probability variation grant form 3)
(3) When the average number of STs due to the variable probability big hit is N, and the average number of STs due to the ceiling privilege is M, the relationship of the following (Formula 4) to (Formula 6) can be satisfied. Regarding this (Formula 4) ~ (Formula 6), the wording of "Time saving number" of (Formula 1) ~ (Formula 3) explained in "(Limited time saving form 3)" in the above finite time saving is changed to "ST number ” is substantially the same as the content replaced with the wording, etc.
(Formula 4) It is constructed so as to satisfy the relationship of "average number of STs N<average number of STs M". Note that the average number of STs M may be an infinite number of times. If the average number of STs M is infinite, it is equivalent to the above-mentioned "infinite variation".
(Equation 5) Configure so as to satisfy the relationship of "average number of STs N=average number of STs M".
(Formula 6) The configuration is made so as to satisfy the relationship of "average number of STs N>average number of STs M".

(Finite probability variation grant form 4)
(4) The number of STs is set to satisfy at least the relationship of "the number of STs due to the ceiling privilege ≤ the maximum number of STs due to the big hit", in order to avoid giving excessive benefits. In the present embodiment, the number of STs due to the ceiling privilege is equal to or less than the number of STs due to the probability variable jackpot 1 or the like, for example, 100 times, 90 times, or the like. Also, focusing on the minimum number of STs due to a big hit, the number of STs satisfying the relationship of "minimum number of STs due to a big hit ≤ number of STs due to a ceiling privilege<maximum number of STs due to a big hit" may be used. In the present embodiment, the number of STs due to the ceiling privilege is more than the number of STs due to the probability variation jackpot 6, etc., less than the number of STs due to the probability variation jackpot 1, etc., for example, 25 times, 50 times, 75 times (same ST number as ST75) etc. is.

(Infinite potential)
(E) “Infinite probability” is a benefit that gives a probability state until the next big hit. In the case of infinite potential, the ST number is "no number limit (infinite)", but in the same way as the above infinite time reduction and infinite probability variation, even if the ST number is given until the next big hit good.

(finite latency)
(F) “Limited probability” is different from the infinite probability mentioned above, in which a probability state is given within a predetermined number of STs so as to achieve an appropriate winning rate. In this embodiment, there is no latent probability big hit that triggers the transition to the latent probability state, but if a part of the probability variable big hit is the latent probability big hit, the finite probability variable grant form 1 explained in the finite probability variation 4 (configuration related to giving the number of STs) can be used. Regarding this point, since it is substantially the same content as the finite probability change (contents in which the wording of "probability change state" is appropriately read as the wording of "potential state"), detailed explanation is omitted to avoid duplicate description .

(forced hit)
(G) "Forced winning" means to forcibly award a jackpot regardless of the jackpot lottery. "Unrelated to the jackpot lottery" means that the jackpot lottery itself is not executed, or even if the jackpot lottery is executed, the result is treated as invalid, and the jackpot lottery is completely irrelevant. not limited in meaning.

The types of forced hits are variable hits (limited hits, infinite hits), short-time jackpots (limited hits, infinite hits), or latent hits (finite hits, infinite hits). There may be. Also, the maximum number of rounds or a round game mode can be determined as appropriate. In addition, it is also possible to appropriately determine the destination game state after the forced hit. For example, it may be the same transition destination game state (for example, time saving A, time saving B, or probability (ST) A to C) as when the jackpot shown in FIG. Grant forms 1 to 4, finite probability variable grant forms 1 to 4, etc. may be shifted to the same game state.

However, in order not to give excessive benefits, as a forced hit, one of the jackpot lottery targets (in this embodiment, one of the probability variable jackpots 1 to 7 and the time-saving jackpots 1 to 2) ) is preferable. More preferably, the degree of profit should not be higher than the total jackpot. The profit here means "profit from the jackpot game" or "profit including the jackpot game and the transition destination game state". In the present embodiment, it is preferable to satisfy at least the relationship of "profit from forced winning ≤ profit from variable probability jackpot 4 (jackpot with the highest degree of profit among all jackpots)".

Since the above-described ceiling privilege can provide a profit that is the same as or different from the profit level provided by the jackpot lottery result, it is useful as a addictive relief function.

Moreover, although various ceiling privileges have been described above, it is free to adopt any ceiling privilege. In addition, ceiling benefits are provided with multiple types of benefits with different characteristics (for example, finite time reduction and finite probability variation), and benefits with the same character but different advantages (profit status) (for example, 100 times of time reduction finite It is possible to provide multiple types of time saving A and finite time saving B with 50 times of time saving. In this case, it is possible to appropriately determine what kind of multiple types of ceiling privileges (two or more ceiling privileges) are to be provided. For example, it is possible to determine by a predetermined lottery whether to provide a finite reduction in working hours and a finite probability variation, and to give any ceiling privilege. In this case, the same lottery probability may be set regardless of the set value, but it is preferable to determine the lottery probability according to the set value, as in the above-described "ceiling privilege lottery". Specifically, as the set value increases, the benefits with a relatively high degree of profit (for example, if you draw a lottery between the finite time saving and the finite probability variation, the "limited probability variation" side) are likely to be granted. On the contrary, As the set value increases, the benefit degree is relatively low ((for example, if you draw a lottery finite time reduction and finite probability variation "limited time reduction" side) can be configured to be easily granted. Note that compulsory In the case of a hit, the above-mentioned case of ``providing multiple types of benefits with different characteristics'' includes, for example, the case of ``providing at least two of the time-saving jackpot, probability variable jackpot, and latent hit jackpot''. However, in the case of providing multiple types of benefits with different degrees of advantage (profit status), for example, ``cases of providing multiple jackpots with different times of time reduction (time reduction jackpots)'' and ``multiple jackpots with different ST times (variable jackpots Or there is a case such as "provide a latent hit".

Further, after the ceiling privilege is provided, the game state (game mode) relating to the ceiling privilege is controlled until the ceiling privilege is consumed or until the jackpot is won. Specifically, if it is a "finite system privilege" such as a finite time saving, a finite probability change, or a finite probability, without winning the jackpot, if the specified time saving number or ST number ends, or if the jackpot is won In this case, the normal mode (normal state) is entered, and the ceiling privilege is not given until the ceiling activation opportunity (ceiling game) arrives again. On the other hand, if it is an "infinite system privilege" such as infinite time reduction, infinite probability change, or infinite probability, the privilege state will be continued until the next big win, and the privilege state will be terminated with the winning of the big win.

In addition, if the ceiling privilege is finitely variable, it is a ceiling privilege of "finitely variable short-time type" that shifts to a time-saving state (limited time-saving or infinite time-saving) when the specified number of STs is completed, such as ST75 mode or ST25 mode. may This “finite variable short-time type” includes the following types (A) to (D).
(A) When the prescribed number of STs (for example, 75 times) is completed, the ceiling privilege of the “finite probability variable / limited time reduction” type that shifts to a finite time reduction (for example, 100 times of time reduction).
(B) Ceiling privilege of “finite probability variable / infinite time reduction” type that shifts to infinite time reduction when the prescribed number of STs is completed.
(Hei) When the first specified number of STs (for example, 75 times) ends, only the electric sapo state ends, and the second specified number of STs (for example, 100 times) moves to a finite probability. ” type ceiling privilege (the first specified number of STs and the second specified number of STs may be the same or different).
(D) When the prescribed number of STs (for example, 75 times) is completed, only the electric sapo state ends and the ceiling privilege of the “finite probability variation / infinite probability” type that shifts to infinite probability.

Returning to the description of the ceiling mode in FIG. Here, as a representative example, a configuration in which "finite reduction in working hours" (100 times of the maximum number of reduction in working hours due to a big hit) is adopted as a ceiling privilege will be described.

Ceiling mode, depending on the ceiling privilege, the internal game state is a game mode related to the time saving state and probability variable state, etc., but here we describe an example in which "limited time saving" is given, so the ceiling mode is , it becomes a game mode related to the time saving state (YJ=01H). However, in the ceiling mode, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated to dedicated "06H" in order to select the ceiling-dedicated variation pattern. Here, when reaching the ceiling (during the ceiling game), a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time (ceiling variation pattern) is selected in order to ensure the duration of the “ceiling effect” described later. there is In this embodiment, the longest variation pattern is selected during all game modes (during all variation pattern selection mode) (see column of "ceiling variation" in FIG. 26). In addition, the ceiling fluctuation pattern is not particularly limited as long as the production time width of the "ceiling production" can be secured, but a fluctuation pattern that has a fluctuation time of at least SP reach during normal mode (at least SP reach without pseudo continuous) is used. It is preferable to configure it so that it can be selected.

In addition, since the jackpot lottery is executed as usual in the 1000th game (ceiling game), if the jackpot is won in the 1000th game, the jackpot game will be started as usual after the 1000th game. Become. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the ceiling game by chance, activation of the ceiling function is restricted (prohibited) (see ceiling activation management processing in FIG. 13 to be described later). ), when the ceiling privilege is given, the 1000th game is a case of "losing" (when a small win is provided, it is a case of a small win or a loss). This point is not limited to when the ceiling privilege is finite time saving, but the same is true for infinite time saving, infinite probability variation, finite probability variation, infinite latent probability, or finite probability. However, when the ceiling privilege is "forced winning", the state is forcibly controlled to the jackpot winning state, so the jackpot lottery itself in the 1000th game is not executed, or the result is invalidated even if the jackpot lottery is executed. It should be treated as if the jackpot for the ceiling was won. Therefore, when the ceiling privilege is a "forced win", after the 1000th game, a jackpot game (forced jackpot game) related to the jackpot for the ceiling is started in the same way as when a normal jackpot is won. becomes. In addition, the performance during the hit during the forced jackpot game may be the same as the normal jackpot (same as one of the time-saving jackpot 1 and the probability variable jackpot 1 to 7), or the performance during the hit dedicated to the forced jackpot may be displayed. may

(7-4-1. Regarding effects during ceiling mode)
During the ceiling mode, a transition is made to a "ceiling effect mode" in which an effect (ceiling effect) for notifying that the player has reached the ceiling is displayed. This ceiling effect mode is a effect mode dedicated to the ceiling (1000th game), and in the case of this embodiment, is a effect mode limited to one game (limited to one rotation). As an example of the effect in the ceiling effect mode, for example, a decorative pattern (decorative pattern for the ceiling) at the time of the ceiling appears, at least a decorative pattern different from that in the normal mode (number patterns of 1 to 9). The reason for saying "At least the decoration pattern different from normal mode" is that the ceiling is reached when you encounter a big hook in normal mode, and the decoration pattern that is different from the decoration pattern that has appeared in normal mode for a long time. This is because it is appropriate to make it appear and notify that it has reached the ceiling.

Specifically, the ceiling decoration pattern is a dedicated pattern (ceiling decoration pattern) that displays a special character, item, or character, and the ceiling decoration pattern is a pattern that has a strong impact in terms of production. Preferably, for example, the decorative pattern 778 (decorative patterns of “heaven”, “☆”, and “well”) shown in Remark 1 of FIG. 7 is used. There are three normal decorative pattern rows, a right pattern, a middle pattern and a left pattern (see FIG. 5), but the ceiling decorative pattern row does not necessarily have to be three pattern rows. For example, it is possible to have four symbol rows of "heaven", "well", "to" and "till", or two symbol rows of "heaven" and "well". Also, in order to emphasize that the ball has reached the ceiling, a giant decorative pattern having a larger display area than a normal decorative pattern, or a pattern with a predetermined effect image may be used. In addition, regarding the decorative patterns related to the ceiling game, normal decorative patterns are used during the variable display (all or part of the same decorative patterns), and only the decorative patterns that are finally stopped (decorative stop patterns) are used as the decorative patterns for the ceiling. good too.

A dedicated character image 777 appears as a background display of the decorative pattern. This character image 777 is a special effect that appears only in the ceiling game. In addition, as one of the characteristic effects, when the symbol variation display game is started, a "right-hand shot instruction image 779 (shooting guidance notification effect)" appears to prompt a right-hand shot.

The reason for displaying the right-handed instruction image 779 is as follows. When a finite reduction in time is given as a ceiling privilege (the same is true when an infinite reduction in time, finite probability change, or infinite probability change is given), a “state with electric support” occurs at the start of the 1000th game. For this reason, it is intended to immediately inform the player that hitting to the right is advantageous so as not to give a disadvantage to the player. In this embodiment, a right-handed instruction image 779 appears at the same time or substantially at the same time as the symbol variation display game is started. In addition, considering the fact that the "state with electric sapo" occurs at the ceiling (1000th game), during the omen mode or during a part of the period (for example, the game immediately before the ceiling game (the last omen mode)), It is preferable to display an effect (preliminary firing guidance notification effect) for notifying that the "right-handed shot" will soon occur.

Further, in the case of "losing" in the symbol variation display game at the ceiling (1000th game), it is preferable not to display the specific advance notice effect. For example, at least the high-expectation-level announcement effect does not appear, or at least one of the simulated series, ready-to-win effect, and player-participation type effect does not appear. The reason for this is that there is no need for an exaggerated forewarning effect that arouses the expectation of winning the jackpot at the peak. However, this is not the case when a simulated series, a ready-to-win effect, or a player participation type effect is provided as a preview effect dedicated to the ceiling mode (ceiling game). However, in any case, it is preferable not to show a notice effect that arouses the expectation of winning. It is preferable to set the effect mode exclusively for the ceiling, which is different from the effect mode appearing in the mode. Also, as a privilege for reaching the ceiling, a setting suggestion effect may appear. This is because providing the player with useful information such as the setting guessing element is useful in increasing the willingness to play the game of the player who encounters a addiction. In addition, when the setting suggesting effect is displayed at the ceiling, the appearance rate may be 100%, or may be displayed by a predetermined lottery.

On the other hand, in the ceiling game (the 1000th game), if a jackpot is won by chance, the effect related to the ceiling effect mode is not displayed, but the normal effect mode (for example, during the general mode or the omen mode). (See the "Ceiling" column in FIG. 24). This is because if a ceiling effect is displayed even when a jackpot is achieved in the ceiling game, it becomes unclear whether a jackpot or a ceiling privilege is given, and the player is confused.

(7-5. Heaven Mode)
The heaven mode is a game mode that is shifted to the next game (1001th game) of the ceiling game, and according to the ceiling privilege, the internal game state becomes a game mode related to a time saving state, a probability change state, etc. Here, Since the example in which "finite time saving (time saving number of times 100 times)" is given is described, the ceiling mode is a game mode related to the time saving state (YJ=01H). Further, during the heaven mode, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated to dedicated "07H" so as to select a variation pattern dedicated to heaven. In addition, when shifting to this heaven mode, it is a case of ceiling benefits other than "forced hit" (limited time reduction, infinite time reduction, infinite probability change, finite probability change, infinite probability, or finite probability).

The heaven mode is terminated when a jackpot is won, or when a specified number of times of time reduction or ST is completed without winning a jackpot in the case of the finite ceiling privilege. Here, the ceiling privilege is described as "finite time saving (100 times saving time)", so heaven mode is when 100 times saving time ends, or when a jackpot is won during the time saving number of times will be terminated. Then, when the heaven mode ends, the mode is shifted to the normal mode. In addition, if the ceiling privilege is finite probability variation or finite probability, it will be terminated when the number of STs ends or if you win a jackpot within the number of STs, and infinite time reduction, infinite probability variation and infinite probability In this case, it will be terminated when the jackpot is won.

(7-5-1. Fluctuation state related to heaven mode)
Here, during the heaven mode, any of the above-described high speed fluctuation state, medium speed fluctuation state, low speed fluctuation state, and the like can be adopted. However, it is preferable to determine the variable state during heaven mode according to the ceiling privilege type. For example, if the ceiling privilege is limited time reduction or infinite time reduction, it is preferable to position it as a game mode that emphasizes game characteristics such as "enjoying production" as in the time reduction mode. That is, the fluctuation state in heaven mode at the time of finite time reduction or infinite time reduction is "variation state in heaven mode < high speed fluctuation state in ST mode" or "variation state in heaven mode ≤ medium speed fluctuation state in ST mode ” is preferable. However, in consideration of the point that there is no limit to the number of times of time saving when giving infinite time saving, it may be in a high speed fluctuation state.

On the other hand, when the finite probability variation or infinite probability variation is given, the probability of the jackpot lottery is high in addition to the state with the electric sapo, so it can be the same or almost the same variation state as the high-speed variation state in the ST mode. preferable. On the other hand, when infinite or finite probability is given, the probability of winning the jackpot lottery is high, but it is controlled without an electric sapo, so it is difficult for the ball to hold the operation as in the normal state. . Considering this point, when infinite or finite latency is given, the same or almost the same fluctuation state as the normal mode, or at least a slower fluctuation state than the short time mode (average digestion time is relatively long fluctuation state ) is preferable. That is, the relationship is set to satisfy "fluctuation state in normal mode≦variation state in infinite or finite latency <variation state in time-saving mode".

(7-5-2. Regarding production during heaven mode)
During the heaven mode, a transition is made to a "heaven effect mode" for performing a effect (heaven effect) related to the heaven mode. This heaven effect mode is a special effect mode after the next game of the ceiling (after the 1001st game), and ends when the heaven mode ends. During this paradise production mode, the background display is switched to a special background display different from other game modes (for example, a "space background image" expressing outer space) to notify that the paradise mode is on.

In addition, as a ceiling privilege, when giving finite time saving or infinite time saving, the above-mentioned "time saving production mode (air battle mode)" related to time saving state may be adopted as heaven production mode.

In addition, when giving finite probability variation, infinite probability variation, finite probability, or infinite probability as the ceiling privilege, the above-mentioned "ST production mode" related to the probability variation state may be adopted as the heaven production mode. In this case, as in the ST production mode, the ST production mode may be shifted to a different ST production mode according to the number of times ST is consumed. Specifically, depending on the number of ST digests, the production mode is sequentially changed like "ST production early stage mode (underwater acoustic battle mode) ⇒ ST production middle stage mode (water battle mode) ⇒ ST production final stage mode (land battle mode)". can be transferred. In the case of infinite probability change or infinite probability, there is no limit on the number of STs, so after the ST101st time, the ST end stage production mode may be continued as it is, or a separate new ST production mode (ST continuous production mode) You can move to In addition, it is also possible to return to the ST presentation early stage mode in ST101 and loop the transition of "ST presentation early stage mode ⇒ ST presentation middle stage mode ⇒ ST presentation final stage mode" again.

In addition, during the heaven production mode, it may be configured to be switchable between normal/simple/premium mode, like the contents of the already explained "omen production mode" and "ST production mode". , a configuration in which switching between normal/simple/premium modes is impossible (control is performed in a state in which switching is not possible).

In addition, as part of remedial measures for a player who is very addicted, during the heaven mode, the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects may be made higher than in other game modes. For example, the heaven mode should be configured so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect (the setting suggestion effect that can appear during the symbol variation display game) is higher than at least the normal mode (general mode and/or omen mode). can be done. In particular, if the ceiling privilege is a privilege with an electric sapo (ceiling privilege other than infinite potential and finite potential), it is placed under a high base state during heaven mode, so the player can use his own ball (game The game can be progressed without reducing the game medium owned by the player or the game value equivalent thereto, or while maintaining the current situation. Therefore, some players say, ``Until you see the setting suggestion effect, you can be a little addicted,'' and in contrast to the normal mode, you can learn advantageous information by being addicted. It is conceivable that there are many players who want to do so. In consideration of such a point, it is preferable to change the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects with high probability during heaven mode to function as a "setting suggestion appearance chance zone". As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play after becoming hooked.

<8. About the game progress mode: Fig. 6, Fig. 7>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7, a specific game progress mode related to the gaming machine 1 will be described while paying attention to the game mode transition control and the presentation aspect.

It should be noted that, as to what kind of strokes the player should make to obtain an advantageous situation, basically it changes according to the internal game state. It changes depending on the game mode to be played). As already explained, if it is a normal state (normal mode), it is advantageous to aim at "left hitting" so that the game ball passes through the left flow path 3b. If it is time saving mode, ceiling mode, heaven mode), "right hitting" aiming so that the game ball passes through the right flow path 3c is advantageous. In the following, it is assumed that the player follows an advantageous beating method according to the game state, and unless otherwise specified, in the case of left-handed beating advantage (normal state), "symbol variation display game 1 on the side of special figure 1" is executed, and in the case of right-handed advantage (probability variable state, time-saving state), it is assumed that "symbol variation display game 2 on the side of special figure 2" is executed. Also, the game mode will be described as starting from the "normal mode" which is the initial game mode.

When a big win is won in the normal mode, it becomes a so-called "first win", and a big win game corresponding to the won big win is started (see "first win" block frame in FIG. 6). The hitting method during the big win is "right hitting" aiming at the big winning hole 50 side.

Focusing on the performance aspect, if you win the probability variable jackpot 1 (5R probability variable ST100: special figure 1 side highest profit jackpot) during the normal mode, the decorative pattern stops at "7 patterns aligned (777)". to be notified that you have won the jackpot with the highest profit. As for the performance during winning at the time of winning one probability variable jackpot, the ``ST entry confirmation performance'' for definitely notifying the ST mode entry appears, and the confirmation of the shift to the ST100 mode is notified. Then, after the big hit game, the mode is shifted to ST100 mode.

On the other hand, in the normal mode, when the variable probability jackpots 2 and 3 and the time-saving jackpots 1 and 2 are won, the decorative symbols are stopped except for "7 patterns are aligned", and the probability variable jackpot is won in this pattern fluctuation display game. or whether it is a time-saving jackpot is not notified. In the case of stopping other than ``seven patterns are complete'', the ``ST rush challenge performance'' of the player participation type performance is developed in the winning medium performance during the subsequent big win game, and the big win type is notified by the performance result. . In this ST rushing challenge presentation, when the success presentation appears, it is decidedly notified that the probability variable big win is shown, and when the failure presentation appears, the time saving big win is announced. In addition, there are two types of success effects, "great success effect" and "normal success effect". However, when the "normal success effect" appears, it is reported that the variable probability jackpot 3 (ST25 mode) has been won. On the other hand, there are two types of failure productions, "big failure production" and "normal failure production". , and when the ``normal failure effect'' appears, the fact that the winning time saving jackpot 1 (time saving A: time saving 100 times) is notified.

When the variable probability jackpots 1 to 3 are won, after the jackpot game, the corresponding ST mode is shifted (refer to the block frame of the ST mode in FIG. 6), and when the time-saving jackpots 1 and 2 are won, after the jackpot game. , is shifted to the time-saving mode (see the block frame of the time-saving mode in FIG. 6). Then, during the ST mode and during the time saving mode, as described above, it becomes "right-handed advantage", and the symbol variation display game 2 on the side of the special figure 2 is executed. When the jackpot is won on the side of the special figure 2, as shown in FIG. 4, it is all probability variable jackpots, so as long as the jackpot continues to be won during the ST mode or the time saving mode, the ST mode loops and the player is greatly profited. is designed to bring

When one of the probability variable jackpots 4 to 7 is won during the ST mode, the decoration pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed. For example, if you win the "probable variable jackpot 4 (10R variable ST100)" of the highest profit jackpot (highest profit jackpot among all jackpots) on the special figure 2 side, a special decorative pattern that is not displayed in the normal mode (for example, a number (not a pattern, but a pattern displaying a character, etc.) stops to congratulate the winning of the jackpot. In addition, if the profit degree is lower than the probability variable jackpot 4 (10R probability change ST100), but the profit degree is higher than the probability change jackpot 6 (7R probability change ST25), "odd number "Pattern matching" is stopped, and "Even number pattern matching" is stopped when "probability variable jackpot 6 (7R probability variable ST25)" with the lowest profit degree is won. It should be noted that during the jackpot game, a hit-during effect corresponding to the jackpot type appears.

(Regarding the case of winning the "variable jackpot 7 (special 7R variable)")
However, when winning the "probability variation jackpot 7 (special 7R probability variation)", "odd number pattern alignment" or "even number symbol alignment" is stop-displayed with a predetermined probability. In the event that the even-numbered pattern arrangement is stopped, a hit-during performance that is at least partly common to the above-mentioned definite variable jackpot 5 (7R definite variable ST25) and/or definite variable jackpot 6 (7R definite variable ST75) is performed during the subsequent jackpot game. Appears, at a predetermined timing of the performance during the hit, for example, during the performance during a specific round or the ending performance, information on the probability variable jackpot 7 winning (for example, confirmation of entry into ST mode (ST100 mode)) is announced (promotion notification). As a result, even if the "even pattern matching" stops, the possibility of entering ST100 mode, which can be expected to be highly profitable, is left, and the expectation of entering ST mode can be fueled by the production during the hit. It's becoming

However, in the performance during the hit, without notifying the above promotion, the performance during the hit that is common (same) as the probability variable big hit 5 (7R probability variable ST25) and / or the probability variable big hit 7 (7R probability variable ST75) appears. It is also possible to hide the probability variable jackpot 7 (special 7R probability variable) winning, and notify the probability variable jackpot 7 (special 7R probability variable) winning during the ST mode after the big win game.

If the promotion notification is performed during ST mode (ST production mode), it may be during the period until ST early stage mode ends (until ST ends 25 times), but ST early stage mode end game (ST It is preferable to notify during the middle 25th rotation). Specifically, until the 1st ST number (for example, ST25 times with probability variable jackpot 5 wins) or the 2nd ST number (for example, ST100 times with probability variable jackpot 7 times), whichever is smaller (For example, the number of games during ST reaches 25 times), the display can be controlled so as not to directly indicate whether the first win (for example, the probability variable jackpot 5) or the second win (for example, the probability variable jackpot 7). is. However, the notification timing is not limited to such timing, and the timing of the promotion notification may be, for example, the start of the next game after the end of the ST opening production mode or a predetermined timing during the ST middle stage mode. Also, a "step-up"-like promotion notification may be performed in which the first promotion notification is performed in the ST early stage production mode, and the second promotion notification is performed in the ST middle stage production mode. In this case, the first promotion notification is a promotion notification that notifies that entry into the ST75 mode or above is definite, and the second promotion notification is a promotion notification that definitely notifies entry into the ST100 mode. In this way, it is possible to maintain a sense of tension as to whether the winning jackpot type is any one of probability variable jackpots 5 to 7 over a long period of time from the jackpot game to the ST mode. In other words, it is possible to maintain the expectation of transition to the ST100 mode. Incidentally, it is possible to determine whether to notify the promotion during the performance during the winning or to notify the promotion during the ST mode by a scenario lottery or the like when determining the performance scenario during the winning at the start of the big winning game.

(transition to ceiling mode)
In addition, in the normal mode, if the big win is not won until the 989th game, the game is shifted to the "precursor mode" from the 990th game (refer to the block frame of the precursor mode in FIG. 7). When the game reaches the 1000th game without winning a jackpot even in the omen mode (reaching the ceiling), the game shifts to the "ceiling mode" and the ceiling function is activated. In the present embodiment, when the game is lost, the ceiling privilege "Limited Time Reduction" is given, and from the 1001st game onwards, the mode is shifted to heaven mode.

<9. Regarding the function for prohibiting the specific advance notice effect during the omen mode: Fig. 32>
Here, in the present embodiment, a specific advance notice effect prohibition function (specific notice effect prohibition means) works during the portent mode. Specifically, focusing on the point that the omen mode is a game mode related to the notification that the ceiling is near, and the point that the ceiling mode is a game mode related to the granting of the ceiling privilege, omen mode (omen effect mode) and ceiling mode (ceiling effect mode) prohibits the appearance of a specific advance notice effect. In the case of this embodiment, as the prohibition function, there is provided a "means for prohibiting the prefetching notice during the sign (specific prefetching notice prohibiting means)" for prohibiting the execution of the prefetching notice. Hereinafter, the "means for prohibiting pre-reading advance notice during a sign" will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 32 .

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a case where a prefetching notice is prohibited by the prefetching notice prohibiting means in the sign. FIG. 32 illustrates a mode in which "holding change notice" is treated as a prohibited target by means for prohibiting prefetching notice during a sign. It can be set as "pre-reading notice in the middle".

(A. A configuration without provision of means for prohibiting prefetching advance notice in the sign (normal case): FIG. 32 (b))
The "normal case" will be described with reference to FIG. This "normal case" indicates a configuration in which no prefetching advance notice prohibiting means is provided during the sign, and a configuration provided with a predictive prediction prohibiting means during the sign described later (see (C-1) (C-2) ) is shown as a comparative example. The illustrated pending icon 770 is the "normal pending display (white pending)", the pending icon 771 is the "high expectation pending display" of the special pending display (ordinary pending change notice), and the pending icon 772 indicates "holding display for ceiling (holding change notice for ceiling)". In addition, the hold icon 771 here indicates a "rainbow color hold (retained hold display)" that can appear when a big win is won among the special hold displays.

Also, for convenience of explanation, FIG. (Hereinafter referred to as "ceiling game pending ball") is shown as a representative case.

In the case of the comparative example shown in FIG. Regardless, execution of the suspension display for the ceiling (suspension change notice for the ceiling) is permitted for the suspension display of the 1000th game. Here, "permitting" the suspension display for the ceiling means that it may appear either when it always appears or when it appears when a predetermined lottery is won ((Loss) to be described later). ) (C-1) and (C-2) are the same). Therefore, in the case of this comparative example, even if there is a hold change notice of the third rainbow color hold (this hold), the hold display of the fourth ceiling game hold ball is Fujimaru's hold icon 772 (for the ceiling). pending display).

However, if the jackpot is won before reaching the ceiling, the ceiling function is not activated (the number of ceiling games is reset), so it can be said that there is little need to execute the ceiling suspension display. In addition, if a hold change notice (special hold display) for notifying the degree of winning expectation and a ceiling change notice (ceiling hold display) for notifying that it is a ceiling game are displayed at the same time, notices with different characteristics are displayed. The displays will appear at the same time, which may confuse the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a means for prohibiting pre-reading advance notice during a sign is provided to solve these problems.

(B. Configuration example in which means for prohibiting prefetching advance notice in omen: FIG. 32 (b), (ha-1), (ha-2))
Hereinafter, a configuration example in which the above-mentioned "means for prohibiting pre-reading advance notice during a sign" is provided will be described. In this case, there are two forms: "a case of preferentially executing the normal pre-reading notice" shown in Fig. (b) and "a case of preferentially executing the pre-reading notice for the ceiling" shown in Fig. (Ha-1) and (Ha-2). be.

(Case where normal pre-reading notice is preferentially executed: Fig. 32 (b))
FIG. 32(b) is a case of "executing a normal pre-reading notice with priority", specifically, "a case of prohibiting a pre-reading notice for the ceiling if there is a hold before reaching the ceiling game (ceiling game holding ball This is a case where pre-reading notice is prohibited for the target)”. Here, as in the case of FIG.

In the case of this example, when there is a hold before the ceiling game is reached, the hold display for the 1000th game (ceiling game) is not changed to the hold display for the ceiling (hold change notice for the ceiling), but the "normal hold display". appears. In other words, the configuration is such that the "prefetching prohibited object suspension" by the prefetching foreknowledge prohibition means in the omen is set to the "ceiling game suspension ball".

The reason why the prefetching prohibition target hold is set as the "ceiling game hold ball" is as follows. If there is a hold before the ceiling game, the jackpot is won before the ceiling function is activated (before the ceiling privilege is given), so there is little need to display the ceiling reservation display. In addition, in the case of a configuration in which the holding display for the ceiling is prohibited when there is a fixed hold, if the hold display for the 1000th game remains the normal hold display, it is a speculation element that "there is a fixed hold before reaching the ceiling game". , and the player who knows this can prevent wasteful beating until the ceiling is reached. However, if this secure hold does not prohibit the ceiling display at all when this secure hold exists, but if the hold change notice (rainbow color hold) related to this secure hold does not appear, that is, it is a look-ahead for this secure hold If the advance notice lottery results in "losing", the suspension display for the ceiling may appear (permit). If the hold change notice relating to this reserved hold is not displayed, the player cannot know that this reserved hold exists before reaching the ceiling game, but even if the hold display for ceiling has appeared. Even so, if a big win is won before the ceiling game is reached, the player is not particularly disadvantaged. In addition, instead of prohibiting the appearance of the hold display for the ceiling when the hold change notice (rainbow color hold) related to this secure hold appears, it is more than a high expectation hold change notice (for example, green hold or more) It is also possible to prohibit the appearance of the suspension display for the ceiling when the suspension change notice of is displayed.

(Case of priority execution of pre-reading notice for ceiling: Fig. 32 (Ha-1) (Ha-2))
Next, the case of preferentially executing the pre-reading notice for the ceiling will be described.

Fig. 32 (H-1) is an example of "a case of preferential execution of pre-reading notice for ceiling",
(α) A configuration example of “while prohibiting part of the normal pre-reading notice during the omen mode, allowing the ceiling change notice (ceiling hold display)”,
(β) shows a configuration example of "in the foreshadowing mode, normal pre-reading notice is totally prohibited, while ceiling pending change notice (ceiling pending display) is allowed".
In the configuration example shown in FIG. This is an example of a configuration in which only "balls that are held in operation" are excluded from the prohibited objects, and the balls held in the ceiling game are excluded.

In (α) above, ``prohibiting part of the normal pre-reading notice'' means, for example, of the normal hold change notice (special hold display), while allowing the appearance of the low-expectation hold change notice, It is configured such that the appearance of the expectation pending change notice is prohibited. Specifically, configurations 1 and 2 below are used.
(Configuration 1) Appearance of hold change notices below yellow hold (blue hold and yellow hold) is allowed, and green or higher hold change notices (green hold, red hold and rainbow color) with higher winning expectations than the yellow hold Hold) is prohibited from appearing.
(Configuration 2) A configuration that permits the appearance of hold change notice (hold display other than rainbow-colored hold) indicating other than accuracy, and prohibits the appearance of hold change notice hold indicating accuracy.

The above "configuration 1" prohibits only high-expectation hold change notices such as green, red, and rainbow colors in the case of this reservation. On the other hand, the above "configuration 2" prohibits only the "rainbow color hold" of the reserved hold display among the high expectation hold change notices. Therefore, in the case of configuration 2, occurrence of hold change notice other than "rainbow hold" indicating accuracy is allowed.

"Totally prohibit pre-reading notice" in (β) above means that normal pre-reading notice (here, hold change notice) is prohibited at all, and the appearance of hold change notice for ceiling (hold change notice for ceiling) It is a configuration that allows. Therefore, in the case of the above configuration (β), the usual pre-reading notice does not appear at all during the precursor mode, and only the appearance of the pending change notice for the ceiling (holding display for the ceiling) is permitted.

The reason for the arrangement shown in Fig. (H-1) ((α) or (β) above) is as follows. If the appearance of the normal hold change notice (special hold display) is blindly allowed, the normal hold change notice and the ceiling hold display will be displayed at the same time. It invites confusion for game beginners). In particular, if the high expectation pending change notice and the ceiling pending change notice are mixed, the degree of confusion of the player increases. Therefore, it is preferable to prohibit the look-ahead announcement itself, or at least prohibit the high-expectation pending change announcement. In addition, when part or all of the pre-reading notice is prohibited during the omen mode, the player does not know the existence or the possibility of the existence of this secure stop before reaching the ceiling game. This is because even if the high expectation pending change notice indicating that the game is not displayed, the player will not be particularly disadvantaged if the jackpot is won before the ceiling game is reached. In addition, if the pre-reading notice itself during the omen mode is completely prohibited, it also leads to a reduction in the effect control load.

FIG. (H-2) is a configuration example in which, unlike the above-described FIG. (H-1), the suspension change notice for the ceiling is preferentially executed by setting a part of the period in the precursor mode as the look-ahead prohibited section. FIG. (H-2) shows, as a representative example, an example in which the maximum number of held balls before the ceiling game (the interval between the 996th and 999th games) is set as the look-ahead prohibition interval. In the case of this example, the pre-reading notice is completely prohibited in the section from the 996th to the 999th game. However, instead of completely prohibiting the pre-reading notice in the section, it may be configured to "prohibit part of the pre-reading notice" as shown in (α) in the above diagram (H-1).

It should be noted that all of (A), (B), (Ha-1) and (Ha-2) in FIG. The number of remaining games up to can be configured to be able to be notified. Here, the countdown display itself does not give notice of the degree of expectation for winning, but only gives notice of the remaining ceiling game, and does not fulfill a notice function such as a look-ahead notice. However, it is also possible to announce the degree of expectation for winning by using the effect mode of the countdown display, that is, to inform the possibility of the existence of this reservation. For example, in the case of preferential execution of the ceiling pre-reading notice in Figure (Ha-1) or (Ha-2), the operation hold ball (1-2 Each time an item) is digested, a special countdown display (for example, a difference in display color or a difference in display size) that is different from the normal countdown display (display mode when this reservation does not exist) is performed to May indicate the existence of a hold. For example, if the normal countdown display uses a white number image, the special countdown display may change the number image to a color other than white (red) or make the number image larger. be.

The present embodiment can include, for example, the following configuration regarding pre-reading notice.
Acquisition means (S301, S302 in FIG. 10, S314 in FIG. 11) for acquiring predetermined game information based on the establishment of the starting condition (initiated by the detection of the game ball by the starting means);
A lottery means (S410 in FIG. 12) for executing a lottery related to winning based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means;
Symbol display means (special symbol display device 38, S309 in FIG. 10) for performing a variable display operation of symbols and displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery means in a stopped display mode of symbols;
Reservation storage means (reservation storage area of RAM 203) for reserving and storing the game information acquired by the acquisition means with a predetermined maximum reservation storage number as the upper limit until the game information is provided for the variable display operation of the game patterns in the symbol display means. , S311 to S314 in FIG. 10) and
a prefetch determination means (S318 in FIG. 11) for prefetching and determining a lottery result of at least the lottery means before the variation display operation of the game symbols based on the reserved memory is executed;
Prefetching notice effect control means (production control unit 24, S1008 in FIG. 19) configured to be capable of controlling the execution of prefetching notice that notifies information related to the result of prefetching determination by the prefetching determination means;
pre-reading notice prohibition control means (FIG. 32) for prohibiting the execution (display) of the pre-reading notice based on a predetermined prohibition condition;
Ceiling privilege control means (S420, S421, S412 in FIGS. 7 and 12, FIGS. 13 to 15, etc.) that grants a ceiling privilege more advantageous than a normal state (executes and controls the ceiling privilege) based on a predetermined granting condition. and,
The above-mentioned ceiling privilege is granted (for example, the ceiling game is imminent, or the ceiling privilege is granted within the existing number of balls with pending operation, or the pattern variation display game related to the target ball with suspended operation ceiling privilege advance notification control means for executing and controlling a ceiling pre-notification effect (for example, ceiling hold change notice (ceiling hold display) in FIG. 32) that gives advance notice that a ceiling privilege will be given if executed); , and a plurality of types of game states (game modes) can be configured to be controllable. The pre-reading notice prohibiting means prohibits the execution of the pre-reading notice during the entire period or a part of the period during the specific game mode (Fig. 32 (b) (Ha-1) (Ha-2)). The specific game mode is, for example, a game mode before reaching the ceiling game (before shifting to the ceiling mode). Further, the ceiling privilege control means, specifically, after a predetermined start condition is established (for example, after the end of the power support or after the jackpot game, or after transition to a game state with a low probability state, etc.), the winning game is not generated (or the jackpot is not won), and the number of symbol changes (number of games) executed in a game state with a low probability state reaches a predetermined upper limit number (number of ceiling games) It works as a functional part that controls the ceiling privilege (privilege game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the game state.

(Game mode related to latent state)
In the case of providing the latent certainty state, for example, as shown in FIG. 28, different data values may be set for the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) corresponding to the other game state and the game state determination number YJ. A game mode corresponding to the latent certainty state may be provided as a "latent certainty mode", and a performance mode related to the latent certainty mode may be provided as a "latent certainty performance mode". Moreover, although all the ST modes according to the present embodiment have been described as game modes corresponding to the "probability variation state", all or part of the ST mode can be treated as a game mode corresponding to the "potential probability state". In addition, the variation state under the latent probability mode (latent probability state) will be explained in the above “(7-5-1. Variable state related to heaven mode) “when infinite or finite probability is given””. Similarly, it is preferable to have the same or substantially the same fluctuation state as the normal mode, or at least a slower fluctuation state than the time saving mode (a fluctuation state in which the average digestion time is relatively long).

<Processing on main control unit side: FIGS. 8 to 18>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 18, game operation processing on the side of the main control unit 20 of this embodiment will be described. The processing on the main control unit 20 side consists of an infinite loop main processing (main control side main processing: FIG. 8) and timer interrupt processing (main control side timer interrupt processing: FIG. 9) and are centrally configured.

<12. Main processing on main control side: Fig. 8>
Main processing (main control side main processing) on the main control unit 20 side will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing the details of the main processing on the main control side. When the main processing on the main control side is started, the watch dog timer (WDT) function is exhibited and the CPU is forcibly reset (WDT reset). In either case, when the main control side main process is started, the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) first executes the initial setting process necessary for starting the game operation as part of the power-on process (step S011). ).

After completing the initial setting process in step S011, it is then determined whether or not it is in a setting change mode transition state in which setting values can be changed (step S014). In the case of this embodiment, the setting key switch 94 (operated to the setting change mode side) and the RAM clear switch 98 are pressed while the power to the game machine 1 is off and the door is open (the door opening sensor 61 is ON (open detection)). When the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on while the ON operation is continued (both the setting key switch signal and the RAM clear signal are ON), the current setting value is displayed on the setting display 97, indicating that the setting change operation is in progress. , is controlled to a setting change allowable state (setting change mode transition state) in which setting values can be changed.

If it is in the setting change mode transition state (step S014: YES), a setting change process for managing the change operation of the setting values (steps 1 to 6) is executed (step S023). In the setting change process, first, the setting value storage area of the RAM 203 is cleared, and the ON/OFF operation of the setting change switch 95 related to the setting change operation is monitored. The setting value can be changed to any one of the setting values 1 to 6 by operating the setting change switch 95 by a person involved in the hall or the like, and turning off the setting change completion switch 96. The set value is confirmed by . When the CPU 201 confirms that the setting value has been determined, the CPU 201 stores the setting value data in the setting value storage area of the RAM 203, and exits the setting change process. Then, the processing state is shifted to the intra-area RAM clear processing (step S031) described later. The RAM clear switch 98 can function as a setting change switch without providing the setting change switch 95 (the RAM clear switch 98 also functions as the setting change switch 95). In addition, the setting key switch 94 can function as a setting change completion switch without providing the setting change completion switch 96 (configuration in which the setting key switch 94 also functions as the setting change completion switch 96). In this case, the setting change operation can be terminated by turning off the setting key switch 94 .

On the other hand, if it is not in the setting change mode transition state (step S014: NO), the contents of the RAM are checked to determine whether there is an abnormality (step S015). Here, whether or not the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is a normal value (whether or not a value indicating any of settings 1 to 6 is stored), and whether the checksum value at the time of backup is Check whether the value is normal. If there is an abnormality in the contents of the RAM (step S015: YES), a process for waiting for power on again (step S020) related to the RAM error is executed.

If the contents of the RAM are normal (step S015: NO), then it is determined whether or not the backup flag BF is ON (5AH) (step S016). This backup flag BF is set to "5AH (normal value)" in the BF flag storage area of the internal RAM when the backup process is executed normally in the power supply abnormality check process (step S081 in FIG. 9), which will be described later. is set to Therefore, in normal operation, the backup flag BF should be 5AH. However, the backup flag BF may not be a normal value (≠5AH) due to some trouble. Therefore, if the backup flag BF is not in the ON state (step S016: NO), the process of waiting for the power to be turned on again is executed (step S020).

In this power re-on waiting process, a control process for forcibly stopping the progress of the game process is executed as a process in the event of a RAM error. This power-on waiting process is also executed when the RAM is abnormal in step S015 (step S15: YES). When this power reactivation waiting process is executed, the power of the gaming machine 1 is reactivated, and the setting change transition mode state is set at the time of reactivation, unless the above setting change process (step S023) is executed. The RAM error condition has become irreversible. In this embodiment, the setting change process (step S023) and the RAM clearing process in the area (step S031) described later are executed to clear the entire area of the RAM 203 (however, the RAM area related to the performance display (outside RAM area)). area) is cleared and the RAM error is resolved.

If the backup flag BF is ON (step S016: YES), it is determined whether or not it is in the RAM clear mode transition state (step S025). In this RAM clear mode shift state, when the RAM clear operation is performed, specifically, the setting key switch 94 is turned OFF (not operated to the setting change mode side) while the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned off. The transition is made when power to the game machine 1 is turned on while the RAM clear switch 98 is ON (setting key switch signal OFF, RAM clear signal ON).

If it is in the RAM clear mode transition state (step S025: YES), the in-area RAM clear processing is executed (step S031). In the area RAM clearing process, at least the storage area of the RAM 203 excluding the RAM area related to the performance display and the setting value storage area is cleared. Therefore, the value of the backup flag BF and the checksum value set at the time of power shutdown are both cleared to zero in this process. Also here, various commands necessary for clearing the RAM (for example, a "RAM clear command" indicating that the RAM is cleared, a "customer waiting command", etc.) are sent to the effect control unit 24. When the performance control unit 24 receives the RAM clear command, it executes the initialization notification performance for notifying the RAM clear, and sets the performance mode to "normal performance mode" as the performance mode in the initial state. Specifically, the game mode is set to the normal mode of the initial mode, and the production mode is also set to the normal production mode corresponding to the normal mode (normal A to normal C production modes (for example, normal mode) .

When the RAM clearing process in the area of step S031 is finished, the initial setting process (initial data setting process at power-on) at the time of RAM clearing is executed (step S032). In the power-on initial data setting process, for example, 30000 ms is set to the transmission timer of the RAM clear signal (one of the security signals), and the special symbols to be displayed on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b (special symbol 1 stop symbol, As the special figure 2 stop design) data, set the losing design data. Then, a CTC setting process (step S036), which will be described later, is executed.

Returning to the description of step S025, if it is not in the RAM clear mode transition state (step S025: NO), then it is determined whether or not it is in the setting confirmation mode transition state (step S026). When the setting confirmation operation is performed, the setting key switch 94 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 98 is turned OFF while the game machine 1 is turned off. (setting key switch signal ON, RAM clear signal OFF), the transition is made when the power is turned ON. The above-mentioned "setting confirmation operation" is, for example, an operation performed when a person concerned with a hall or the like confirms the current setting value.

If it is in the setting confirmation mode transition state (step S026: YES), setting confirmation processing (step S027) is executed to control the setting confirmation state in which the current setting value can be confirmed. Then, a backup return process (step S028) is executed to restore the game process from the backup data backed up at the time of power failure. In the setting confirmation process, a display process for displaying the current setting values on the setting display 97 (setting confirmation display) is performed. The display of the set values is terminated when the setting key switch is turned off. After the setting key switch 94 is turned off, the backup recovery process is performed, and the CTC setting process (step S036), which will be described later, is performed.

If it is not in the setting confirmation mode transition state (step S026: NO), that is, if the gaming machine 1 is simply turned on, the backup recovery process (step S028) is performed, and the game process at the time of backup is performed based on the backup data. bring back.

After executing any one of the setting change process (step S023), the area RAM clear process (step S031), the setting confirmation process (step S027), and the backup restoration process (step S028), the CTC setting Processing is executed (step S036). Here, a CTC setting process is executed for periodically generating a timer interrupt every 4 ms. As a result, an interrupt request signal is periodically output to the interrupt controller thereafter, and the main control side timer interrupt processing (4 ms interrupt processing) shown in FIG. 9 is executed.

Then, assuming that the game-startable state is ready, the firing control signal (firing permission signal ES) for permitting the firing operation of the firing device 32 is set from the OFF state (firing prohibited state) to the ON state (firing permitted state), and the game is played. A start command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 . This permits the shooting operation of the game ball from the shooting device 32 . Further, when the effect control unit 24 receives the game start command, it performs an initial operation (initialize operation) regarding the movable accessory. However, during the initialization operation, the image display mode of the liquid crystal display device 36, the light emission mode of the decoration lamp 45, and the sound output from the speaker 46 do not change. The initialization operation here is exclusively an operation check when power is turned on for the movable accessory.

After completing the series of power-on processes, an infinite loop process of steps S040 to S045 relating to normal game progress is executed. As a result, the game is controlled in a game-startable state in which the game can be progressed. When the loop process is entered, first, the CPU is set to the interrupt disabled state (step S040), and various random number update processes are executed (step S041). In this random number update processing, various software random numbers (random numbers circulating within a predetermined numerical range by increment processing) used in the special symbol variation display game and the normal symbol variation display game are updated. For example, random numbers for special design determination used for symbol lottery, random numbers related to subsidized lottery Random number) used to change the initial value (start value) (initial value random number for special pattern judgment, initial value random number for auxiliary hit judgment, etc.), random number for variation pattern used for selection of variation pattern, etc. Update.

When the various random number updating processes (step S041) are finished, then the performance display monitor aggregation division process of the out-of-area program is executed (step S043). In this performance display monitor aggregate division processing, processing necessary for calculating the base value to be displayed on the performance display device 99 is executed.

When the performance display monitor tabulation division process of step S043 is finished, the interrupt permission state is set (step S045), the process returns to step S040, and thereafter the processes of steps S040 to S045 are repeatedly executed (main loop process). . The CPU 201 repeatedly executes various random number updating processes and performance display monitor tallying and dividing processes, except during timer interrupt processes that are executed intermittently.

<13. Main control side timer interrupt processing: Fig. 9>
Next, timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing main control side timer interrupt processing. This main control side timer interrupt processing is started by an interrupt from the CTC at regular time intervals (about 4 ms), and is executed by interrupting the execution of the main control side main processing.

In FIG. 9, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 immediately executes the power failure check process without saving the contents of the register (step S081). In this power supply abnormality check process, the level of power supplied from a power supply board (not shown) is monitored. A checksum operation (here, 8-bit addition operation processing for the RAM in the area) for calculating , and backup processing including storage of the operation result are performed. The power failure check process functions as backup means for retaining data in a predetermined area of the RAM even after the power is turned off.

Then, timer management processing is executed (step S082). The timer values of various timers (time) used for game operation control of the gaming machine 1 are updated here.

Next, an input management process is executed (step S083). In the input management process, based on detection information from various sensors and switches provided in the gaming machine 1, various counters (for example, winning counters for counting winning balls provided for each winning hole) are updated. Also, here, based on the input information of the state signal from the payout control board 29, the input data is created. If any of the status signals indicates an abnormality, predetermined error processing is performed in error management processing (step S089), which will be described later.

Next, a setting abnormality check process is executed (step S084). In the setting error check process, it is determined whether the set value data is a normal value (a value indicating settings 1 to 6), and if the value is not within the normal range, it is assumed that an abnormality has occurred in the set value data, and a setting error is detected. Set the flag to the ON state (5AH). Then, a set value abnormality command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the setting abnormality check process is exited. In addition, when the effect control unit 24 receives the setting value abnormality command, the effect means is used to execute setting abnormality error notification (RAM error notification). If the setting error flag is ON when the setting error check process is executed again, the process ends without doing anything.

Next, a timer interrupt internal random number management process is executed (step S085). In the timer interrupt random number management process, the random numbers for each variable display game are updated periodically. Specifically, in order to randomize the count value of the random number counter, the random number for special symbol determination and the random number for auxiliary hit determination are updated (+1 added for each interrupt), and the random number counter goes around Each time, the start value of the random number counter is changed. The random number for internal lottery (random number for judging a big hit) is generated by the random number generating circuit, so it is not updated here.

Then, error management processing is executed (step S089). In this error management process, based on detection information related to various switches and sensors, status signals from the payout control board 29, etc., it is monitored whether an error (abnormality) has occurred in the game operation. In that case, an error command capable of identifying the error type is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and error processing corresponding to the error type is executed. Also, when the error is canceled, an error cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and error cancellation processing is executed.

Next, a prize ball management process is executed (step S090). In this winning ball management process, the winning counter is checked, and if there is a winning, a payout control command designating the number of winning balls is transmitted to the payout control board 29 . When the payout control board 29 receives the payout control command, it controls the game ball payout device 19 based on the prize ball number information included in the payout control command to execute the payout operation of the designated number of prize balls.

Then, normal design management processing is executed (step S091). In this normal symbol management process, necessary processes are executed for the normal symbol variation display game (normal symbol variation display operation). Here, it is monitored whether or not the game ball is detected by the normal symbol start opening sensor 37a, and when the game ball is detected, predetermined game information (such as a random number for auxiliary hit determination) necessary for the auxiliary winning lottery is generated. Acquire (general figure random number acquisition process), hold and store the game information up to the maximum number of reserved memories (here, 4) as reserved data (normal figure operation reserved ball) (normal figure reserved storage process). Then, when the predetermined fluctuation display start condition is satisfied, an auxiliary winning lottery based on the normal pattern operation reserved ball is performed, and the selection of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern based on the auxiliary winning lottery result and the normal pattern stop display mode (normal stop design). Also here, in order to operate the variable display of the normal pattern, if it is in the process of generating LED display data for variable display, if it is not in process of generating LED display data for stop display (normal pattern display data update process).

Next, a normal electric accessary product management process is executed (step S092). In this normal electric accessary product management process, a process necessary for executing the normal electric open game is executed. Here, when the lottery result of the auxiliary winning lottery is a hit, the process of setting solenoid control data for the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c is executed. The solenoid control data set here is converted into an excitation signal in the solenoid management process of step S100, which will be described later, and the excitation signal is output to the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c. Thereby, the opening/closing operation pattern of the opening/closing lid 47 is controlled.

Next, a special symbol management process is executed (step S093). In this special symbol management process, a process relating to a special symbol variation display game is executed. In this special symbol management process (jackpot determination means), a big win lottery is mainly performed in the special symbol variation display game, and based on the lottery result, the special symbol variation pattern (forecast variation pattern, variation pattern at the start of variation) or Determine special stop symbols and the like. Details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, a special electric accessary product management process is executed (step S095). In this special electric accessary product management process, mainly based on the jackpot lottery result, execution control of the winning game according to the winning win, setting processing of the transition destination game state after the jackpot game, etc. are necessary for the winning game. processing. The special electric auditors management process works as special game control means for controlling the execution of a winning game according to the winning type. The details of the special electric accessary product management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, a right hitting notification information management process is executed (step S097). In this right-handed notification information management process, when it is under a "right-handed advantage" game state (during a winning game, during a state with an electric sapo (time-saving state or variable probability state)), the right-handed display device 39b is lit. LED data for turning off the right-handed display device 39b is created when the game state is "advantageous for left-handed" (normal state).

Next, an LED management process is executed (step S098). In this LED management process, output control of control signals (dynamic lighting data) to various LED display devices such as the normal symbol display device 39a, the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the right-handed display device 39b is executed. The control signal based on the LED display data created in the normal symbol management process (step S091), the special symbol management process (step S093), the right-handed notification information management process (step S097), etc. is output in this LED management process. be done.

Next, an external terminal management process is executed (step S099). In this external terminal management process, various outer end signals are generated through the frame external terminal board 21, and output control is executed for an external device such as a hall computer HC.

Next, a solenoid management process is executed (step S100). In this solenoid management process, based on the solenoid control data set in the normal electric auditors management process (step S092) and the special electric auditors management process (step S094), the normal electric auditors solenoid 41c and the big winning opening solenoid 52c output control of the excitation signal is executed. As a result, the movable wing 47 and the opening door 52b are driven and controlled, and the opening and closing operations of the lower start opening 35 and the big winning opening 50 are realized.

Next, all registers are saved (step S101), performance display monitor processing belonging to the outside program is executed (step S102), and then all registers are restored (S103). In the performance display monitor processing, necessary processing regarding calculation of the base value to be displayed on the performance display device 99 and display control is executed.

Next, the WDT count value is cleared (step S104). As a result, the WDT is reset for each interrupt and the count value is returned to the initial value.

After completing the processing of steps S081 to S104, the timer interrupt processing is terminated, and the main control side main processing is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<19. Special Symbol Management Processing: Fig. 10>
Next, the special symbol management process (step S093) in FIG. 9 will be described. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing details of the special symbol management process.

In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first performs a "special figure 1 start opening check process" for the special symbol 1 side (upper start opening 34 side) (step S301), and then special symbol 2 side (lower start opening 35 side). Executes the "special figure 2 start opening check process" (step S302). The details of this special figure 1 starting opening check processing and special figure 2 starting opening check processing will be described later in FIG.

After completing the start opening check process of steps S301 to S302, the state of the small hit flag is determined (step S303). This "small hit flag" is a flag for specifying whether or not a small win game is in progress, and when the flag is ON (5AH), it indicates that a small win game is in progress. When the flag is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that the small winning game is not in progress. In addition, in the present embodiment, a small hit is not provided, but in the following description, it is assumed that the hit type includes a "small hit".

When the small hitting flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S303: ≠5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S304). This "condition device operation flag" is a flag for designating whether or not a big win game is in progress. is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that the jackpot game is not in progress.

During the small winning game (step S303:=5AH), or when the big winning game is in progress (step S304:=5AH), without performing the processing related to the variable display operation of the special symbols in steps S306 to S308, step S309 as it is. Proceed to the special symbol display data update process. Therefore, during either the small winning game or the big winning game, the variable display operation of the special symbol is not performed. That is, during the winning game, the stop display mode of the special symbols is held while being confirmed and displayed as the small winning symbols or the big winning symbols.

On the other hand, in step S304, if the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S304: ≠5AH), that is, if neither a small winning game nor a big winning game is being played (step S303: ≠5AH, and step S304: ≠ 5AH), processing according to the special symbol operation status (00H ~ 03H). It should be noted that the "special symbol operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol.

In the special symbol operation status branching process of step S305, depending on whether the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H, 01H)", "varying (02H)", or "confirming (03H)". Then, one of steps S306 to S308 is executed. Specifically, when the special symbol operation status is "standby (00H, 01H)", the special symbol variation start process (step S306) is performed. When the symbol fluctuation process (step S307) is "confirming (03H)", the special symbol confirmation time process (step S308) is executed. Here, the above-mentioned "waiting" means that the behavior of the special symbol is in a standby state for the next change, and "during fluctuation" means that the behavior of the special symbol is fluctuating (variation display). The above-mentioned "confirming" means that the variation of the special symbols is finished and the stop (fixed) display is in progress (during the special symbol confirmation time). By these processes, the variable display operation of the special symbols (the display operation of setting the start of variation and the stop of variation) is realized. Details of the special symbol variation start process (step S306) and the special symbol confirmation time process (step S308), which are closely related to the present invention, will be described later with reference to FIGS. 12 and 16A to 16B.

After completing any one of the above steps S306 to S308, the special symbol display data update processing of step S309, which will be described later, is performed. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating. ), and if the special symbols are not fluctuating, data for stop display (data for 7-segment flashing display during stop display) is created. The special symbol display data created here is output in the LED management process (step S098) of FIG. 9, and the variable display and stop display of the special symbols in the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are realized. When the special symbol display data update process is finished, the special symbol management process is exited, and the special electric accessary product management process of step S095 in FIG. 9 is executed.

<11. Special figure 1 starting port check process: Fig. 11>
With reference to FIG. 11, the special figure 1 start opening check process (step S301 in FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the details of the special figure 1 start opening check process. This special figure 1 starting opening check process plays a role as winning processing executed based on establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and is mainly a process related to pending storage when a game ball wins in the upper starting opening 34. and processing related to look-ahead determination. In addition, the special figure 1 start opening check process and the special figure 2 start opening check process are the only differences in whether the processing contents are related to the special figure 1 side or the special figure 2 side, Substantially, the contents of the processing are the same. Therefore, here, in order to avoid duplicate description, the special figure 1 start opening check processing will be mainly described.

In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a prize (winning ball) has been detected at the upper starting port 34 (step S311).

When the winning of the upper starting port 34 (special figure 1 side starting port) is detected (step S311: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 1 operation pending balls is 4 or more (step S312). That is, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 operation reservation ball number is less than the maximum reservation memory number (here, 4 pieces). In addition, when there is no winning detection of the upper starting opening 34 (step S311: NO), the special figure 1 starting opening check process is exited without doing anything.

If the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 operation is 4 or more, that is, if over winning exceeding the maximum number of reserved storage occurs (step S312: YES), an over winning command specifying over winning (in the case of special figure 1 B006H, B106H in the case of special figure 2) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S324). On the other hand, when the special figure 1 operation reserved ball number is not 4 or more, that is, when it is less than 4 (step S312: NO), 1 is added to the special figure 1 operation reserved ball number (+1) (step S313), step S314 proceed to the processing of

When proceeding to the process of step S314, various random numbers used in the special symbol variation display game 1 related to the special figure 1 operation pending ball generated this time are acquired (step S314). Specifically, the current values of the random number for big hit determination, the random number for special symbol determination, and the random number for variation pattern are acquired from various random number counters, and the acquired random number is stored in the reserve storage area of the area RAM. This reserved storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information relating to the symbol variation display game as activated reserved balls (reserved data). 1 variable display operation (until special symbol variable display game 1 is executed), the symbols are retained and stored in the order in which the starting conditions are met (in the order of prize winning). In addition, in the above-mentioned reservation storage area, the reservation storage area corresponding to the special design 1 side and the special design 2 side (the special design 1 reservation storage area (first reservation storage area) corresponding to the special design 1, the special design 2 corresponding to special figure 2 reservation storage area (second reservation storage area)) is provided, each of which can store reservation data for the maximum number of operation reservation balls.

Next, prefetching prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") for prohibiting prefetching determination is obtained from the command data (winning command 1) corresponding to the lower byte side (EVENT) of the above "reserved addition command" (step S315), Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the "prefetch prohibition condition" is satisfied (step S316). This "pre-reading prohibition condition" is a condition that prohibits pre-reading judgment for the special figure 1 operation holding ball side (prohibits pre-reading notice) during special figure 1 start opening check processing (special figure 1 pre-reading prohibition condition ), and in the case of special figure 2 start opening check processing (not shown), the condition for prohibiting the look-ahead judgment for the special figure 2 operation holding ball side (prohibition of look-ahead notice) (special figure 2 look-ahead prohibition condition ). In this embodiment, if the special figure 2 operation holding ball can occur with a higher probability than the special figure 1 operation holding ball "game state with electric sapo (time saving state or variable state)" Special figure 1 Pre-reading is prohibited ', and on the contrary, if it is a `` game state with no electric sapo state (normal state or latent state) '' where the special figure 1 operation holding ball can occur with a higher probability than the special figure 2 operation holding ball For example, 'special figure 2 prefetching is prohibited'. Therefore, in the determination process of step S316, when the current gaming state is the time saving state or the probability variable state, the determination result becomes 'YES' as the special figure 1 prefetching prohibition condition is established. Moreover, as a prefetching prohibition condition, it is possible to prohibit prefetching during a specific game mode (for example, during the portent mode).

Here, in this embodiment, the current game mode can be specified by the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) type (see Tcode column in FIG. 28), so when determining the game mode, the variation pattern selection mode ( Tcode) value can be determined, but separately from the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), an identifier that can identify each game mode itself (for example, game mode determination number YM) is provided, thereby, the current You may determine a game mode. For example, when "general mode A" and "general mode B" are provided as game modes belonging to the general mode, these have the same variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), but are different game modes. This is a case that you want to manage. In any case, when performing some processing based on the current game state (internal game state or game mode) (when performing game processing that requires information about the game state), the current internal game state, the current variation pattern Selected mode or an identifier that can identify the current game mode (game state determination number YJ, variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode, above-mentioned game mode determination number YM, etc.) Using one or more identifiers as appropriate, game operation It may be configured to be capable of processing. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the game mode can be specified by the value of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode).

If the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), skip the prefetch determination processing (steps S317 to S321) and proceed to the processing of step S322 described later. In this case, the look-ahead determination for this special figure 1 operation hold ball is not executed, and a hold addition command with look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") will be created (see step S322 described later) ). As a result, the execution of the pre-reading notice of the current operation-reserving ball is controlled to be prohibited (the pre-reading notice targeting the current operation-reserving ball is not executed).

If the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S316: NO), then it is determined whether or not the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S317). If the setting error flag is ON (step S317:=5AH), that is, if a RAM error (setting error) has occurred, the processing related to prefetch determination (steps S317 to S321) is skipped, and step S322 described later is skipped. Proceed to processing. In this case as well, the look-ahead determination for the current operation-holding ball is not executed, a hold addition command with look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") is created, and the look-ahead notice is not executed. In other words, the prefetching prohibition data (9FH) can also be said to be data designating that the processing related to prefetching determination (steps S318 to S321) has not been executed.

If the setting error flag is not ON (step S317: ≠5AH), random number determination processing is executed (step S318). This random number determination process is performed as part of the 'prediction determination' process, and here, the "win-lose lottery at the start of fluctuation (described later Step S410 of FIG. 12)” is performed in advance.

In the random number determination process, first, a "hit random number determination table (not shown)" is obtained, and a random value for judging a big hit is obtained. Then, based on the obtained random number value for judging a big hit and the winning random number judging table, a win-or-lose lottery (pre-reading win-lose judgment) targeting the current operation reserve ball is executed, and the lottery result (fore-read win-lose result) is acquired.

The hit random number determination table includes a hit random number determination table (special figure 1 A hit random number determination table, a hit random number determination table for special figure 2) are provided. During the special figure 1 start opening check process, the "special figure 1 hit random number determination table" is referred to, and during the special figure 2 start opening check process, the "special figure 2 hit random number determination table" is referred to. This hit random number determination table is also used when performing a win-lose lottery in the later-described "random number determination process for determining the operation of special electric auditors (step S410 in FIG. 12)".

These hit random number determination tables include a determination area (determination value) for determining the type of hit/loss (whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss) for each jackpot lottery probability state (high probability and low probability), It is determined in association with the random number for judging a big hit (the size of the random number for judging a big hit: 65536). to be determined.

In the case of this embodiment, the hit random number determination table is provided with a hit determination table corresponding to each set value (settings 1 to 6) (a table with at least a different lottery probability of a big win depending on the settings 1 to 6). It is In addition, in the case of this embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot lottery probability at high probability to the jackpot lottery probability at low probability (probability increase rate: high probability/low probability) is the same for each set value, and the ratio is 10. It is set to a value that cannot be exceeded. For example, setting 6 "low probability 1/189, high probability 1/63", setting 5 "low probability 1/198, high probability 1/66", ..., setting 2 "low probability 1/ 231, 1/77 at high probability", setting 1 "1/240 at low probability, 1/80 at high probability". Note that the probability increase rate may be different for each set value.

After completing the random number determination process of step S318, the special stop symbol data creation process is executed (step S319). This special stop symbol data creation process is performed as a part of the 'prefetch determination' process, and here, the "variation start symbol A lottery (step S411 in FIG. 12 to be described later) is performed in advance.

In the above special stop symbol data creation process, a "symbol table (not shown )”. Then, the random number value for special symbol determination obtained in step S314 is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the acquired random number value for special symbol determination, a symbol lottery (read-ahead Design judgment) is executed, and the lottery result (pre-reading design result) is acquired.

The above-mentioned "symbol table" includes a "big hit pattern table", a "small hit pattern table", and a "losing pattern table" for determining the jackpot type, small hit type, and loss type, and each pattern table is a special pattern. provided corresponding to the type. These symbol tables are also used when a symbol lottery at the start of variation is performed in the special stop symbol creation process (step S411 in FIG. 12), which will be described later.

In the symbol table, the determination area (determination value) for determining the winning type (symbol type) and the random number for special symbol determination (for example, the size of the random number for special symbol determination: 200) are defined in association with each other. Specifically, the type of winning is determined according to a predetermined symbol lottery rate depending on whether the random number for special symbol determination belongs to which determination value. In addition, special symbol determination data and a special stop symbol number are obtained as data indicating the result of the lottery. In this embodiment, in the case of a big win, one of the big wins is determined according to the symbol lottery rate shown in FIG. In addition, although not shown, the loss type on the special figure 1 side is provided with loss A and loss B, and the symbol lottery rate is 95% for loss A and 5% for loss B. . When losing B is selected, reach other than N reach (for example, SP reach or more reach) is selected with a high probability (see FIG. 26). In addition, the loss type on the special figure 2 side is one type of loss A. The type of failure is not particularly limited, and one or a plurality of failures can be provided.

"Special symbol determination data" is data that identifies the winning type (type of winning: big hit type, small hit type, and loss type), specifically, the winning type shown in FIG. 4 and the losing type (not shown) This is data for identifying which of (one or more types) has been won. This special symbol determination data is used for processing that requires winning type information (for example, game state transition preparation processing in step S412 of FIG. 12 described later, special symbol variation pattern creation processing in step S413, processing related to execution control of a big hit game (Special electric accessary product management process in FIG. 17), etc. The above-mentioned "special stop symbol number" is data specifying the special stop symbol mode to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. , It is used when specifying the stop symbol type of the special symbol on the side of the main control unit 20. As with the special symbol, the normal symbol is provided with normal symbol determination data and a normal stop symbol number.

A pattern table common to all settings may be defined, or a pattern table corresponding to the setting may be defined. For example, it can be configured as shown in (A) and (B) below.
(A) In some or all of the set values, one or more winning types have different symbol selection rates. For example, the symbol lottery rate for the probability variable jackpot 1 can be determined so that the higher the set value, the higher the probability.
(B) In all or part of each setting value, the probability variable entry rate (at least the combined symbol lottery rate of the jackpot (at least the probability variable jackpot and/or the latent probability jackpot) with a high probability state) is different. For example, the probability variable rush rate on the special figure 1 side is 50% (see pattern lottery probability of probability variable jackpot 1 to 3 in FIG. 4), but for example, in the case of setting 1, the probability variable rush rate is 45%, and in the case of setting 6 can be set such that the higher the set value is, the higher the probability becomes, such as a probability variable inrush rate of 50%. In addition, the same applies to the time-saving rush rate (total symbol selection rate of the time-saving jackpot).
In any case, the higher the setting, the better the payout performance (mechanical discount) for the player.

When the special stop symbol data creation process of step S319 is completed, then, the start opening winning random number determination process is executed (step S320). This random number determination process at the time of start-up winning is also performed as part of the 'prediction determination' process, and here, the "variation start time variation 'Look-ahead variation pattern determination' is performed to determine in advance a pattern lottery (step S413 in FIG. 12 to be described later).

Specifically, the result of the look-ahead design determination obtained in the special stop design data creation process (step S319) (at least the winning/losing lottery result obtained in the random number determination process (step S318)) and the variation pattern obtained in step S314 A random number (magnitude of random value: 10000) is used to foresee and judge the "fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation" related to the current operation suspension ball. Specifically, the result of the "special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413)" shown in FIG. 12 described later is read ahead and determined. Since this look-ahead determination is to pre-determine the variation pattern at the start of variation, a "pre-read determination table (not shown) that has the same basic configuration as the variation pattern allocation table shown in FIGS. )”. In the case of this embodiment, the variation pattern distribution tables shown in FIGS. 24 to 27 are provided as tables for both prefetch determination and variation start.

For example, the "hit variation pattern distribution table" in FIG. 24 will be used for explanation. The notation of "probability" in the illustration means a probability variable jackpot, the notation of "time" means a short-time jackpot, and the notation of "probability 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7" indicates a probability variable jackpot 1 to 7, "time 1, 2” means short-time jackpots 1 and 2. Referring to FIG. 24, for example, the current look-ahead symbol result is "probability variable jackpot 1 (probability 1)", the variation pattern selection mode Tcode (current game state) is "00H (general mode)", and the variation If the random number for the pattern belongs to the judgment value (judgment area 0 to 49) of "normal variable direct hit", the illustrated EVENT 1 "21H" (see the EVENT 1 column of "normal variable direct hit") is obtained. Note that the Arabic numerals shown in FIG. 24 indicate the judgment value (the size of the judgment region) (the same applies to FIGS. 25 to 27). "Hit" is selected (selection rate: 50/10000), and if it belongs to the judgment value 50 to 129, "Normal medium N reach B" is selected (selection rate: 80/10000), If it belongs to the judgment value 130 to 209 , "Normal medium SP reach A" is selected (selection rate: 80/10000).

This EVENT1 is data (win command data 1) used for creating a pending addition command, and is data of the second byte (lower byte) of the pending addition command. As a result, the pre-reading prohibited data "9FH" acquired in step S315 of the pre-processing is updated to a data value (excluding the number of pending balls information) that specifies the content of the pre-reading variation pattern in this process, and the pre-reading variation pattern A type is specified. In addition, in this look-ahead variation pattern determination, the number of balls withheld in operation at the time of look-ahead determination is not taken into consideration. The reason is as follows. In the step of determining the variation pattern at the start of variation, the variation pattern is determined in consideration of the number of pending balls in operation (see column of number of pending balls in FIGS. 24 to 27). However, at the time of look-ahead determination, the number of suspended balls in operation at the time of look-ahead determination does not necessarily match the number of suspended operations at the start of variation, so it is not possible to accurately determine the variation pattern (detailed pattern) at the start of variation. Therefore, in the look-ahead variation pattern determination, the variation pattern type (basic pattern) that is the gist of the variation pattern at the start of variation is determined without considering the number of balls that are held in operation at the time of look-ahead determination. For example, referring to the columns of normal fluctuation 4s to normal fluctuation 12s and normal medium N reach A in the "losing fluctuation pattern distribution table" shown in FIG. Different data (refer to the column of COM2 (variation pattern specification command data)) are acquired in order to specify whether it is a variation or normal medium N reach A, but at the time of prefetching determination, regardless of the number of balls that are held in operation , normal fluctuation 4s to normal fluctuation 12s and normal middle N reach A common data (EVEN1 "01H") are obtained.

After completing the series of pre-reading determination processing of steps S318 to S321 above, subsequently, based on the current number of pending balls in operation and the special symbol type, win command data 2 (MODE) on the upper byte side is acquired (special figure 1 "B6H-B9H" is acquired according to 1 to 4 operation retention balls, and "BBH to BEH" is acquired according to special figure 2 operation retention balls 1 to 4). Based on the command data 2 (MODE) and the above entry command data 1 (look-ahead fluctuation pattern designation information) on the lower byte (EVENT) side, create a "holding addition command" (step S322) and store it in the RAM 203 Without doing (because the data regarding the pending addition command is unnecessary thereafter), it is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S323). If prefetching is prohibited or if an abnormality occurs in the set value data, the prefetching prohibition data "9FH" is maintained as it is, so a pending addition command with "prefetching prohibition data" is sent to the effect control unit 24. (See the processing route of steps S315→S322 or S316→S322).

When the pending addition command is transmitted from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 that receives the command determines whether or not the execution of the preliminary announcement is possible if the information included in the pending addition command is "other than the prohibition of prefetching". A lottery (pre-reading notice lottery) is held for the ball, and when the lottery is won, a performance scenario of the pre-reading notice is created, and based on the scenario, the appearance of the pre-reading notice targeting the current operation holding ball is controlled. On the other hand, if it is "pre-reading prohibition designation", the pre-reading notice lottery is not executed, or the pre-reading notice lottery is forcibly processed as a failure, and the occurrence of the pre-reading notice is prohibited. In this embodiment, a pending addition command specifying prefetching prohibition is transmitted both when prefetching is prohibited and when a setting error occurs. The reason for this is as follows. .

In the case of this embodiment, even if a setting error occurs, the game operation is not forcibly stopped. The first reason is that, as already explained, the setting error can be resolved by changing the settings. There is a high possibility that it will fall under the prohibited item. Secondly, if the game operation process is forcibly stopped immediately when a setting error occurs, the player will feel distrustful of the sudden stop of the game. For example, when the pattern variation display game in progress is executed during normal operation, or when a jackpot game is in progress, an abnormal setting error occasionally occurs, and the game is controlled so that the game cannot be played immediately. If it is put away, the profit that the player should originally be able to obtain disappears, causing the player's sense of distrust. In consideration of such circumstances, when an abnormal setting error occurs, only an error notification is given, and although the game progress itself is conditional, the game proceeds as it is. The reason why the expression "with conditions" is used here is that if a setting error occurs, the pre-reading notice is prohibited or the result of the symbol variation display game is forcibly lost (see FIG. 11). Step S317 (=5AH), Step S409 (=5AH) in FIG. 12 described later). The reason why the game is allowed to proceed as it is with "conditional" is that when a setting error occurs, the error is only notified, and if no other countermeasures are taken, the effect will be caused by the effect control process. This is because the jackpot lottery may not be executed correctly.

Next, a set value command is transmitted (step S324). This "set value command" contains information that can specify the current set value, and is used by the effect control unit 24 to control the appearance of the advance notice effect and setting suggestion effect based on the set value. . The set value command is transmitted each time an operation pending ball is generated in the starting port check process. As a result, on the effect control unit 24 side, based on the correct set value information, it is possible to control the appearance of the notice effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect using the foreseeing notice) related to the operation reserve ball. By the above, the special figure 1 starting opening check process is exited, and then the special figure 2 starting opening check process (step S302) is executed.

<21. Special Symbol Fluctuation Start Processing: Fig. 12>
Next, the special symbol variation start process (step S306) in FIG. 10 will be described. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the details of the special symbol variation start process.

In FIG. 12, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the number of special-figure 2 operation pending balls is zero (step S401), and if the number of special-figure 2 operation pending balls is not zero (step S401: NO), the special FIG. 2 executes the process (steps S403 to S416) at the time of start of fluctuation targeted for the number of balls on hold. On the other hand, if the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is zero (step S401: YES), then it is determined whether the special figure 1 operation reservation ball number is zero (step S402), special figure 1 operation reservation ball If the number is not zero (step S402: NO), the process (steps S403 to S416) at the start of fluctuation for the special figure 1 operation pending ball number is executed. By the processing of steps S401 and S402, which of the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially used for the fluctuation display operation (which operation holding ball is digested) "Priority "Variation order" is determined. In this embodiment, when there is an operation holding ball in both the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball, the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially digested.

In addition, when the number of operation reservation balls of both the special figure 2 operation reservation number and the special figure 1 operation reservation number is zero (step S401: YES and step S402: YES), the state of "no operation reservation ball" becomes. This state of "no operation pending ball" is a state where the special symbol is on standby and there is no pending memory. Therefore, if it becomes "no operation pending ball", the process proceeds to step S417, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H)" indicating the above "no operation pending ball" state ( step S417).

If the special symbol operation status is "waiting (01H)" when the above "no operation pending ball" state is reached (step S417: NO) (process during special symbol confirmation time in FIG. 16A described later) See step S472 in), switch the special symbol operation status to "waiting (00H)" (step S418). Then, as an effect control command, a customer waiting command (BA04H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S419), and the special symbol variation start process is exited. When the effect control unit 24 receives the customer waiting command, a demo movie for explaining and introducing (demonstrating) the game related to the gaming machine 1 is displayed based on a predetermined execution condition. )” appears. Specifically, after receiving the customer waiting command, a predetermined time (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed without the game being started, that is, without generating the operation pending ball (without receiving the pending addition command). When the time has passed, a customer waiting effect is made to appear. Until the waiting time (180 seconds) until the start of the customer waiting effect elapses, the display state of the decoration stop pattern that was stopped after the end of the current pattern variation display game continues to be displayed, and the decoration lamp 45 emits light in a predetermined light emission pattern. Then, the speaker 43 displays a "demonstration start waiting effect" in which the sound is muted (predetermined sound effects may be executed), and this state is maintained until the customer waiting effect starts. In addition, after the customer waiting performance (demo screen) is started, the performance control part 24 ends the customer waiting performance and shifts to the "power saving mode" when a predetermined shift condition (power saving mode shifting condition) is satisfied. In the case of this embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) elapses after the start of the customer waiting effect (demo screen), without the operation pending ball occurring and without switching to the menu screen (game setting screen). , the production mode is shifted to the power saving mode, a power saving screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 (for example, the text "Power saving" is displayed on the liquid crystal screen), and a part of the decoration lamp 45 and other production LEDs or Control to turn off all lights (power saving control).

If the special figure 1 operation reservation ball number or the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is not zero (step S401: NO or S402: NO), step S403 to S416 are executed sequentially. In addition, regarding the method of processing steps S403 to S416 described below, the only difference is whether the special figure 1 operation reservation ball is targeted or the special figure 2 operation reservation ball is targeted, and the content is substantially is the same as Therefore, in order to avoid duplication of description, unless there is a particular need, the description will be made without distinguishing which of the operation retention balls is the target of the processing.

When proceeding to step S403, 1 is subtracted from the number of operation pending balls on the side of the special figure to be used for this variable display operation (step S403), and a "reservation subtraction command" including the operation pending ball number information after the subtraction is sent to the effect control unit 24. (step S404).

Next, the special symbol operation confirmation data is stored (step S405). This special symbol operation confirmation data is information that specifies the special symbol type of the current fluctuation start side, and if the special figure 1 is the fluctuation start side, "00H", If the special figure 2 is the fluctuation start side For example, "01H" is stored in the special symbol operation confirmation data.

Next, the pending data stored in the pending storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the pending 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407). In the processing of steps S406 and S407, the pending data stored in the pending storage area (holding 1 storage area) corresponding to the pending storage number n=1 is read out and stored in the judgment random number storage area of the internal RAM. , the pending data stored in the pending storage areas corresponding to the pending n storage areas (n=2, 3, 4) are stored in the pending storage areas corresponding to 'n-1' (step S406), and 4 Clear the storage area to provide an empty area (step S407). As a result, the starting order of the special symbol variation display game matches the order of the number n of operation pending balls (n=1, 2, 3, 4), and the operation pending ball acquired at the time of winning the starting gate wins any of the pending memories. Whether or not it corresponds to the area is specified, and it is possible to hold and store a new active ball.

Next, a game state information transmission process is executed (step S408). In the game state information transmission process, a “game state designation command” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 . The game state specification command here includes game state information that can specify the game state at the start of the game. When the game state designation command is received, the performance control unit 24 grasps the game state based on the information contained therein, and manages the performance mode in a form that maintains consistency with the game state managed by the main control unit 20 side. do. The game state information to be included in the game state designation command may be the minimum necessary information when performing the target game process, for example, information including the current internal game state and/or the current variation pattern selection mode. can do. In addition, as a game state designation command, it is possible to transmit an "internal game information command" that can identify the game state determination number YJ and / or a "distribution mode designation command" that can identify the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode). can do.

Also here, if necessary, information on the special pattern time saving number counter (time saving number of times information) "time saving number command" and information on the special pattern probability variable number counter (ST number information) "ST number command" including sent. Based on the information included in these commands, the effect control unit 24 grasps the remaining time saving number of times and the remaining ST number of times, and notifies the remaining time saving number of times or the remaining ST number of times to produce a "remaining number display effect (for example, countdown display)" can be controlled to appear. Specifically, as the remaining number of times display effect, if it is in the time saving mode, the "remaining time saving number of times display effect" appears, and if it is in the ST mode, the "remaining ST number of times display effect" appears. In addition, since the time reduction command and ST count command transmitted in this process are transmitted with the counter value from which the current game is not subtracted (the counter subtraction process is the special During the symbol confirmation time process (S479, S484)), the effect control unit 24 appropriately decrements the grasped counter value, and is configured to be able to display the remaining number of times display effect (described later). The same is true for the ceiling count command). However, in the case of this embodiment, the time saving number command is sent when the special pattern time saving number counter is other than zero (the time saving number counter ≠ 0), and the ST number command is also the special pattern probability variable number counter Non zero (The probability variation counter value ≠ 0) is transmitted. Of course, even if a counter value is zero, it is good also as a structure which transmits the number-of-time commands and ST number-of-times command containing the information which is zero.

In addition, depending on the game state, it is possible to determine whether to send only the time-saving number command, only the ST number command, or to send both commands. However, if an infinite ceiling privilege is granted, specifically, "infinite time reduction" with no limit on the number of times of saving time, "infinite probability change" or "infinite potentiality" without limitation on the number of STs, or If the number of times (such as 65536 times) is set and the number of times of time reduction and the number of STs can be regarded as "infinite number of times", infinite time reduction, infinite probability variation, or infinite probability is granted, the game state according to the privilege (Heaven mode in this embodiment), in order to reduce the control load, it may be configured not to transmit the time saving command and the ST number command. In addition, when the time saving state or probability variable state given by winning the jackpot continues until the next big win, similarly, the time saving number command and the ST number command may not be transmitted.

Further, the above-mentioned "residual number display effect" can be configured to appear in any of the game modes of the time saving mode, the ST mode and the Heaven mode. In addition, it is preferable that the remaining number of times display effect related to the infinite system is an effect mode informing that the remaining number of times is infinite. For example, if it is an image display effect, it is "remaining ∞ times" or "continue until the next big hit".

(Regarding the remaining ceiling count display effect)
In addition, in the gaming state information transmission process of step S408, a "ceiling count command" including remaining ceiling game number information (information relating to a ceiling counter, which will be described later) is also transmitted. Based on the information included in the number-of-ceilings command, the effect control unit 24 grasps the number of games remaining until the ceiling is reached, and controls the appearance of the "residual number-of-ceilings display effect". In the case of this embodiment, the remaining ceiling count display effect appears in the form of a countdown display during the omen mode (omen effect mode).

The above-mentioned "residual ceiling number display effect" can appear during all or part of the monitoring target (counting target) period of the ceiling game. In this embodiment, it can appear "during normal mode" and/or "during precursor mode". Further, when the remaining ceiling count display effect is displayed in the normal mode, different effects can be provided in the general mode and the portent mode. For example, during general mode, the number of remaining peaks is displayed in a small display area in the corner of the LCD screen (the countdown display is displayed in a small size). It can be notified (large countdown display).

(Processing route when setting values are normal: Processing route following S420)
Next, it is determined whether or not the setting error flag is ON (5AH) (step S409). If the setting error flag is not ON (step S409: 5AH), the above "set value command" is transmitted to the effect control section 24, and then the ceiling function management process shown in FIG. 13 is executed (step S420).

<13. Ceiling Function Management Processing: FIG. 13>
The ceiling function management process (step S420) will be described. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing details of the ceiling function management process (step S420). This ceiling function management process is mainly a process for managing the number of remaining games up to the number of ceiling games.

In FIG. 13, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the "ceiling counter" is zero (step S901). This ceiling counter is a counter for managing (monitoring) the number of remaining ceiling games. Steps S903 to S904 (the ceiling flag is turned ON), which will be described later, and step S915 in FIG. 15 showing the details of the game state transition preparation process (step S412) in FIG. 12). The "ceiling counter" functions as counting means for counting the number of executions, establishments, or occurrences of a specific event, and functions as a functional unit that monitors the arrival of a ceiling trigger opportunity (ceiling privilege provision trigger). The "specific event" referred to here means execution of a symbol variation display game (hit variation or loss variation), winning of a big or small win or loss, transition to a specific game state (transition to a specific game mode or specific transition to a variation pattern selection mode, or transition to a specific internal game state), execution of a big hit game or a small hit, and specific events such as establishment of specific conditions related to games. In this embodiment, the value of the ceiling counter is monitored to determine the arrival of the ceiling function activation trigger. Such counting means can be used, for example, in Modified Example 1 and Modified Example 2 (FIGS. 33 and 34, granting modes (α) to (μ)) of the privilege granting mode to be described later. It is used as a functional unit for monitoring the arrival of an opportunity.

If the ceiling counter is zero (step S901: YES), the ceiling function management process is exited without doing anything. The ceiling counter is set to the initial value when the RAM is cleared by clearing the RAM within the area (step S031) during the main control side main processing shown in FIG. This is the case of shifting, that is, the case where the internal game state shifts to the normal state (see steps S481 and S486 in FIG. 16B, which will be described later).

On the other hand, if the ceiling counter is not zero (step S901: NO), the ceiling counter is decremented by 1 (step S902). If so (step S903: YES), the ceiling flag is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S904). This ceiling flag is a flag for designating whether or not the ceiling counter has reached zero, and is used in the game state transition preparation process at step S412 (see step S915 in FIG. 15). As a result, the ceiling function management process is exited.

Returning to the description of FIG. 12 again, when the ceiling function management process of step S420 is completed, then the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric auditors product is executed (step S410). In this special electric accessory operation determination random number determination process, using the big hit determination random number value, the "win-lose lottery at the start of fluctuation" is executed for the operation reserve ball used for the current fluctuation display operation. The basic processing procedure of this process is the same as the random number determination process in step S318 of FIG. 11, which has already been described.

Here, first, based on the special symbol operation confirmation data, the hit random number determination table of this processing target side (for example, if the special figure 1 side is the processing target, the hit random number table for special figure 1) is acquired. Next, the random number for judging a big hit stored in the random number storage area for judging is obtained, and a lottery is executed based on the random number for judging a big hit and the random number judging table. If the result of the lottery is a "big hit" win, the big win determination flag is set to "5AH", and if a "small win" win, the small win determination flag is set to "5AH", and a "big win" and a "small win" are set. If none of the "hit" is won, that is, in the case of "losing", "00H" is set to both the big-hit determination flag and the small-hit determination flag.

Next, the ceiling activation management process shown in FIG. 14 is executed (step S421).

<14. Ceiling Activation Management Processing: Fig. 14>
FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing details of the ceiling activation management process (step S421) in FIG. In this ceiling activation management processing, necessary setting processing relating to ceiling privilege provision is performed.

In FIG. 14, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the big hit determination flag is ON, that is, whether or not the current game result is a "big hit" (step S920).

If the jackpot determination flag is not ON (step S911: ≠5AH), then it is determined whether or not the ceiling activation flag is ON (5AH) (step S921). This "ceiling activation flag" is a flag for specifying whether or not to activate the ceiling function (whether or not to give the ceiling privilege), and when the flag is ON, the ceiling privilege is given. If the flag is in the OFF state, it is specified that the ceiling privilege is not given. The ceiling activation flag is a flag that is set to an ON state when the ceiling counter reaches zero in the game state transition preparation process of step S412 described later (the step in FIG. 15 showing details of the game state transition preparation process). (See S915-S916). If the ceiling activation flag is ON, it is determined that the ceiling activation opportunity has arrived in the current game (step S921:=5AH), and the processing necessary to provide the ceiling privilege (steps S922 to S925) is performed. executed. On the other hand, if the ceiling activation flag is not in the ON state (step S921: ≠5AH), it is assumed that the ceiling activation trigger has not arrived, and the ceiling activation management process is exited without doing anything.

When the ceiling activation flag is ON (step S921:=5AH), a process necessary for granting the ceiling privilege (ceiling activation) is executed. Here, first, the value of each state buffer set in the later-described game state transition preparation processing (step S412) is set to the corresponding state flag and counter (step S922: state flag setting processing). Thereby, it is controlled to the designated ceiling privilege state. In the case of this embodiment, a finite time saving (time saving state of 100 times of time saving) is specified, and the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "01H" in the omen mode to "06H" in the ceiling mode. It's becoming Then, as end processing for granting the ceiling privilege, each state buffer is cleared (step S923: various setting processing for ceiling activation), and then the ceiling flag and the ceiling activation flag are set to the OFF state (00H) (step S923). S924-S925). Next, the game state information transmission process (step S926) is executed, and the ceiling activation management process is exited. In the game state information transmission process here, a game state designation command including finite time reduction (time reduction state) information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 . As a result, the current game (1000th game) is controlled to a finite time-saving state with the start of the game, and a special symbol variation pattern based on the ceiling mode is selected in the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413) described later, and the ceiling production mode. The production below will appear.

Returning to the description of step S911, when the jackpot determination flag is ON (step S911:=5AH), the ceiling activation management process is exited without doing anything. Therefore, when a big win is won, even if it is a ceiling game, it is controlled to the "ceiling activation inhibited state", and the process when a big win is won is preferentially executed. Therefore, in order to give the ceiling privilege, it is a condition that the player has been addicted to the game for 1000 games. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of addicting games (the number of consecutive failures) is monitored during 1000 games in the normal mode (normal state), and if the game is addicted during the game, the ceiling privilege is given. ing.

(Modified example 1 of the generation timing of the ceiling privilege)
Incidentally, when a big hit is won, a ceiling privilege may be provided without controlling the ceiling function to be in a prohibited state. However, in this case, the ceiling privilege is limited to this game (only one game). This is because the jackpot game is started after the end of the current game. However, even if it is a ceiling privilege for one game only, if a time-saving state or a variable state with an electric sapo is given, the benefits of the electric sapo will be available until the end of this pattern fluctuation display game. Can receive. Specifically, there is an advantage that it becomes easy to win a prize to the lower starting port 35, and the operation holding ball on the special figure 2 side is likely to occur. When a game state with an electric sapo is provided as a ceiling privilege, in this game, at least a "right-handed instruction image 779" shown in FIG. preferable.

(Modified example 2 of the generation timing of the ceiling privilege)
In the present embodiment, a configuration has been described in which a ceiling privilege is provided upon game start, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be employed in which a ceiling privilege is provided upon game termination. In other words, the configuration is such that the timing of the end of the ceiling game is used as the ceiling activation trigger. In the case of this modification, the ceiling privilege is awarded immediately after the pattern variation display game ends. For example, when the ceiling privilege is limited time reduction, it can be in the time reduction state immediately after the end of 1000 games. Further, when the ceiling privilege is "forced winning", after 1000 games are finished, a big winning game (forced winning game) is started. Note that when the end of the game is set as the ceiling activation trigger, the ceiling activation management process (step S421) is performed, for example, during the special symbol confirmation time process (FIG. 16B), which will be described later, related to the process at the end of the symbol variation display game. It may be executed after the process of step S495.

(Modified example 3 of the generation timing of the ceiling privilege)
Further, in the present embodiment, it is explained that the ceiling privilege is given in the 1000th game, but the present invention is not limited to this. Benefits may be given. For example, when addicted to 1000 games (the first granting condition is satisfied), the right to grant the ceiling privilege is established, and the ceiling privilege is granted after a predetermined number of precursor games are played (granting of the ceiling privilege is temporarily suspended and multiple games are played). scheduled ahead). In this case, it is possible to provide a plurality of numbers of precursor games (for example, 1 to 16 games) and determine the number of precursor games by lottery (lottery for the number of precursor games). When the number of precursor games is determined by lottery, the lottery probability for each number of precursor games may be the same for all settings (settings 1 to 6), but it is preferable to determine the lottery probability according to the set value. For example, the higher the set value, the more likely a relatively small number of games will be selected, and the lower the set value, the more likely a relatively large number of games will be selected. If so, it is possible to give the player an element of guessing the settings based on the difference in the number of games played. Also, when a specific number of precursor games (for example, 7 games) is selected, the lottery probability can be determined according to the set value, such as high setting confirmation or setting 6 confirmation.

(Modified example 4 of the generation timing of the ceiling privilege)
In the above-described modification 3, an example has been described in which the right to grant the ceiling privilege is once suspended until the predetermined number of precursor games are completed, that is, the example in which the right suspension period depends on the number of times the game is executed. However, the right reservation period may not depend on the number of game executions, but may depend on the passage of time. For example, it is a "time-limited" ceiling grant form in which a ceiling privilege is awarded when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the ceiling game. Specifically, the ceiling privilege is given at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display game related to the ceiling game. In this case, by using the interval time from the start of the ceiling game to the start of the ceiling privilege, an effect to notify in advance that the finite time reduction will soon occur, for example, a "right-handed instruction image 779" shown in FIG. It is possible to urge the player who is hitting to the left to hit to the right and prevent wasteful hitting.

Returning to the description of FIG. 12 again, after finishing the ceiling activation management process of step S421, the special stop symbol creation process is executed (step S411). In this special stop symbol creation process, the "symbol lottery at the start of variation" is executed using the winning/losing lottery result of step S410 and the random number for special symbol determination. The basic processing procedure of this process is the same as that of the special stop symbol data creation process (step S319) shown in FIG.

Here, first, a symbol table (any one of a big win symbol table, a small winning symbol table, and a losing symbol table) is selected according to the special symbol operation confirmation data (special symbol type) and the win/lose lottery result of step S410. For example, if the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H and the big hit determination flag is 5AH, that is, if the current fluctuation start side is 'special figure 1 side' and the winning lottery result is 'big hit', 1 jackpot symbol table" is selected. Then, the random number value for special symbol determination stored in the random number storage area for determination is acquired, a symbol lottery is executed based on the selected symbol table and the random number value for special symbol determination, and the special symbol determination which is the result of the lottery is executed. The data and the special stop symbol number are stored in corresponding areas of the intra-area RAM.

After finishing the special stop symbol creation process of step S411, game state transition preparation process is executed (step S412).

<15. Game state transition preparation processing: Fig. 15>
The game state transition preparation process (step S412) will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing details of the game state transition preparation process.

In this game state transition preparation process, when a big win is won, data for designating the transition destination game state after the big win game (see FIG. 4) is stored in a predetermined buffer (state buffer). (Steps S911 to S914), and processing for storing data for designating a ceiling privilege in a predetermined buffer (steps S915, S916, and S917) when the ceiling flag is in an ON state because of the failure. ing. First, the processing contents of the former "when winning a jackpot" will be described.

(If you win the jackpot)
When the jackpot determination flag is ON (step S911:=5AH), the "game state transition table selection table" shown in FIG. 22 is acquired (step S912). Next, with reference to the acquired game state transition table selection table for big win, the current game state (game state at the time of winning (game state determination number YJ in this embodiment)) and hit type (special symbol determination data) Acquire the game state transition table (any of JTTBL-1 to 5) corresponding to (step S913), and store the data specified in the acquired game state transition table in various state buffers (step S914: state buffer setting process). The game state transition table defines various data for transitioning to a desired game state. JTTBL-1 to 5 are provided in the game state transition table according to the present embodiment, and in detail, as shown in FIG. 22, JTTBL-1 is "time saving A", JTTBL-2 is "time saving B" , JTTBL-3 is "probability variation A", JTTBL-4 is "probability variation B", and JTTBL-5 is "probability variation C".

The value stored in the state buffer is read out in the jackpot ending process shown in FIG. 18 (see step S509 in FIG. 17 and step S592 in FIG. (Flag memory area or counter memory area corresponding to each state buffer), thereby specifying the game state after the jackpot game (the transition destination game state in FIG. 4).

The roles of the above various status buffers are as follows.
(α) "General electric role open extension transition state buffer, normal symbol time reduction transition state buffer, normal symbol probability change transition state buffer, special symbol time reduction state transition state buffer, special symbol probability change transition state buffer"
ON/OFF designation data for each function for designating the internal game state is set. Specifically, the general electric goods open extension state flag that specifies the operating state of the open extension function, the normal design time saving state flag that specifies the operating state of the normal design time saving function, the normal design normal that specifies the operating state of the normal design variable function Data for a special symbol probability variation state flag, a special symbol probability variation state flag specifying the operating state of the special symbol probability variation function, and a special symbol probability variation state flag specifying the operating state of the special symbol probability variation function are set.
(β) “Special pattern time saving counter buffer”
Data for specifying the number of times the special symbol time saving function continues to operate (data for the special symbol time saving number counter) is set.
(γ) “Special symbol probability variation counter buffer”
Data for specifying the number of times the special symbol probability variation function continues to operate (data for the special symbol probability variation counter) is set.
(δ) “Special symbol fluctuation counter 1 to 3 buffers”
Data for designating the number of continuations of a specific variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) (data for a special symbol variation number counter) is set.
(ε) “Variation pattern allocation designation number 1 to 3 buffers”
When a predetermined update condition is satisfied, data (data for variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode) specifying a variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) to be updated is set.

For example, if the current game state is "normal state (YJ = 00H)" and "variable probability jackpot 2 (5R variable probability ST75)" is won, based on the game state transition table selection table shown in FIG. 21, "JTTBL -4”, that is, the game state transition table for variable probability B (see FIG. 22) is obtained. In this case, "5AH (ON designation)" is set in the general electric role opening extension transition state buffer ~ special design probability variation transition state buffer, and "25 times" is set in the special design time saving number counter buffer, special design "75 times" is set in the probability variable number counter buffer. As a result, the transition destination game state after the jackpot game is specified as "time saving number 25+ST number 75". Also, as the game mode transition designation data, "02H (ST early stage designation)" is set in the fluctuation pattern allocation designation number 1 buffer, and "25 times (ST early stage mode continuation number)" is set in the special symbol fluctuation number counter 1 buffer. is set, and "02H (ST middle stage designation)" is set in the fluctuation pattern allocation designation number 2 buffer, and "50 times (ST middle stage mode continuation number)" is set in the special symbol fluctuation counter 2 buffer. be. As a result, the game mode transition form of "25 times in ST early stage mode 50 times in ST middle stage ⇒ time saving mode" is specified.

(S. Modified example of ST number / time saving number: case where ST number or time saving number differs depending on the setting value)
In this embodiment, it is assumed that the same game state transition table is selected regardless of the set value when the same jackpot is won. That is, even if the current setting is any one of 1 to 6, for example, when winning the variable probability jackpot 1, the state is shifted to the variable probability state (variable probability A (ST100 mode)) specified by JTTBL-3. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the same jackpot is won, it may be shifted to a variable probability state with different ST times or to a time saving state with different times of time saving according to the set value. In this case, at least the data values related to the special symbol probability variation number counter and/or the special symbol time saving number counter may be configured to be able to select different game state transition tables according to the set values.

Also, in the above description, the case where the same jackpot wins has been explained, but it is also possible to focus on different jackpots and make the following configuration. For example, depending on the set value, the presence or absence of a specific number of STs or the presence or absence of a specific number of times of reduced working hours may be determined. Specifically, in the case of the first set value, there is a specific jackpot giving a specific number of STs, and in the case of the second set value, the specific jackpot does not exist. That is, in the case of the first set value, the big win lottery objects include the "specific big win", but in the case of the second set value, the big win lottery objects do not include the "specific big win".

With the above configuration, when winning a specific probability variable jackpot (may be a latent probability jackpot) or a specific short-time jackpot, the following (SA) and (SB) create game characteristics described below. be able to.

(SA) For example, when winning a specific variable probability jackpot, each setting value (settings 1 to 6) may set a different number of STs (each is shifted to a variable state with a different number of STs), or at least A different number of STs may be set for one setpoint (at least one setpoint is shifted to a variable state with a different ST number than the other setpoints). As a representative example, in the former example, if the same probability variable jackpot is won, for example, "ST number of settings 1 to 6 is 100 times to 105 times" case). In the latter example, if you win the same probability variable jackpot, for example, "Settings 1 to 5 are 100 ST times, setting 6 is 101 times" (a case where setting 6 is confirmed with 101 ST times) or " Settings 1 to 4 are 100 ST times, settings 5 and 6 are 101 times."times" and so on.
In addition, in the case of focusing on a different probability variable jackpot, for example, if you win the 1st hit among the hit types that are subject to the jackpot lottery, the number of STs is set to 1st (for example, ST 100 times), and if you win the 2nd hit is set to a second ST number (for example, 105 times) different from the first ST number, and in the case of the first set value, at least the second hit is not included.
In the case of these configurations, when a certain probability variable jackpot is won, the number of STs differs depending on the set value, so setting suggestions can be made according to the number of STs. Specifically, if it is a specific ST number, one of the settings 1 to 6 can be found, or in a specific setting value area (low setting area, high setting area, setting 1 denied, setting 6 confirmed, etc.) It turns out that there is. In other words, it is possible to create novel game characteristics such as creating the function (setting suggestion) of the setting suggestion effect by using the "number of STs".

(SB) Similarly, when winning a specific time-saving jackpot, each setting value (settings 1 to 6) may set a different number of times of time-saving, or set a number of times of time-saving with a different set value of at least 1 You may Also, in the case of focusing on a different probability variable jackpot, for example, if you win the first hit among the hit types that are subject to the jackpot lottery, it will be the first time-saving number of times (for example, time-saving 100 times), and the second hit will be won. When it does, it is set to the second number of times of time saving (for example, 105 times) different from the first number of times of time saving, and in the case of the first set value, at least the second hit is not included. In these cases as well as the configuration of (SA) described above, when it is a specific time saving number of times, it is one of the settings 1 to 6, or a specific setting value area (low setting area, high setting area, It is possible to make setting suggestions according to the number of times of saving time, such as setting 1 denial, setting 6 confirmation, etc.), and the novelty of creating the function of setting suggestion production (setting suggestion) using "time saving number" A certain game property can be created.

It should be noted that the particular jackpot in this example may be one or more jackpots. The specific jackpot is preferably a jackpot with the lowest symbol lottery rate (for example, variable probability jackpot 1) or a jackpot with the lowest degree of advantage (profit status). The reason is as follows. A jackpot with the lowest symbol lottery rate is positioned as a "rare jackpot" that is rarely won. Therefore, when winning the jackpot, it is preferable to provide the player with advantageous information such as "suggestion of settings" as a privilege. In addition, the jackpot with the lowest degree of advantage (profit status) has a low profit even if the player wins the jackpot with great effort, and the player is disappointing with the jackpot, and there is a fear that the player's willingness to play will decrease. Therefore, it is preferable to provide the player with advantageous information such as "suggestion of settings" when the player wins the jackpot, thereby preventing the player from losing his or her willingness to play.

The configuration of (SA) above can be, for example, the configuration of (SA-1) below.
(SA-1)
A lottery means for executing a lottery for a plurality of types of hits when the starting means detects a game ball;
a symbol display means for performing a variable display of symbols and displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery means in a stationary display mode of the symbols;
a winning game execution control means for controlling execution of a winning game when the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning;
After the winning game is over, until the number of times the pattern changes reaches a predetermined upper limit, the lottery probability of winning is a high probability state (specifically, a high probability). A game state with a probability state: a variable probability state or a latent probability state),
A gaming machine having different probabilities that the result of the winning lottery will be a predetermined result according to a set value that can be changed in a plurality of stages,
The setting values that can be changed in multiple stages include at least a first setting value and a second setting value,
The stochastic variation control means is
When the set value is the first set value, when the first winning is won by the lottery means, the high probability state is controlled until the first upper limit number of times is reached,
When the set value is the second set value, when the first win is won by the lottery means, the high probability state is maintained until the second upper limit number of times different from the first upper limit number of times is reached. can be configured to control

Also, the above (SA-1) may be configured as the following (SA-2).
(SA-2)
The stochastic variation control means is
When the first win is won by the lottery means, control to the high probability state until the first upper limit number of times is reached,
When the second win is won by the lottery means, control to the high probability state until the second upper limit number of times different from the first upper limit number of times is reached,
When the set value is the first set value, at least the second win may not be included in the result of the lottery by the lottery means.

In addition, in the case of the above (SB) configuration, instead of the probability variation control means, "a ball entry advantageous state (electric support state) in which the ball entry state to the starting means is more advantageous than the normal game state (normal state) Advantageous game state control means for controlling to an advantageous game state (time saving state) accompanied by "is provided. and,
The advantageous gaming state control means is
When the set value is the first set value, when the first win is won by the lottery means, the advantageous game state is controlled until the first upper limit number of times is reached,
When the set value is the second set value, when the first win is won by the lottery means, the advantageous game state is maintained until the second upper limit number of times different from the first upper limit number of times is reached. It should be configured to control.

(If the jackpot is not won (losing) and the ceiling flag is ON)
Returning to the description of FIG. 15 again. If the jackpot determination flag is not in the ON state (5AH) (step S911: ≠5AH) and the ceiling flag is in the ON state (step S915:=5AH), the ceiling activation start preprocessing (preprocessing for giving the ceiling privilege) , the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S916). The ceiling activation flag set to the ON state in this process is confirmed in the ceiling activation management process (step S421) in the next game.

Next, the “ceiling game state transition table” shown in FIG. 23 is obtained (step S917). In FIG. 23, JTTBL-6 to JTTBL11 (limited time reduction to infinite potential) are exemplified as ceiling game state transition tables corresponding to various ceiling benefits. In practice, a necessary ceiling game state transition table may be provided according to the ceiling privilege type.

Next, the data determined in the obtained game state transition table for the ceiling are stored in the above-described state buffer (step S914: state buffer setting processing). The values stored in these state buffers are read out in the ceiling activation management process (step S421, see step S922 in FIG. 14), and are stored in predetermined storage areas of RAM 203 (each flag storage area and counter storage area corresponding to the status buffer). As a result, the gaming state relating to the ceiling privilege is designated. Note that "* (times)" and "* (H)" shown in the figure are arbitrary data values, meaning that appropriate values can be set according to the playability and design values. For example, in the case of the present embodiment, the ceiling privilege is representatively described as "limited working hours (100 times of working hours)". It is

When both the big hit determination flag and the ceiling flag are in the OFF state (00H) (when step S911 is ≠5AH and step S915 ≠5AH), nothing is done and the game state transition preparation process is exited.

Returning to the description of the special symbol variation start processing in FIG. 12 again. After finishing the game state transition preparation process of step S412, next, a special symbol variation pattern creation process is executed (step S413). In the special symbol variation pattern creation process, a variation pattern distribution table corresponding to at least the current game state and the symbol lottery result (special symbol determination data) in step S411 is acquired. In the case of this embodiment, the current set value, the current variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), the pattern lottery result, and the number of balls in operation (existing balls in operation, excluding A "fluctuation pattern distribution table" corresponding to (0 to 3) is acquired.

(Variation pattern allocation table: Fig. 24 to Fig. 27)
24 to 27 show fluctuation pattern distribution tables. Figure 24 shows the per variation pattern allocation table for "general use, omen use, ceiling use, time saving use, heaven time saving use", and Figure 25 shows each per variation for "ST early stage, ST middle stage, ST end stage" Fig. 26 shows each loss variation pattern distribution table for "general use, omen use, ceiling use, time saving use, heaven time saving use", and Fig. 27 is for ST early stage, ST middle stage, ST end stage It shows each "losing variation pattern distribution table" for. In addition, "FB1 to FB17" shown in Figures 24 and 25 are hit fluctuation pattern distribution table types selected when winning, and "FH1 to FH21" shown in Figures 26 and 27 are hit fluctuations selected when losing. Indicates the pattern distribution table type.

It should be noted that "heaven time saving" (see "time saving / heaven time saving" column) of the fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIGS. 24 and 26 is a common table with the time saving mode, but the fluctuation pattern dedicated to heaven time saving A distribution table may be provided. Further, a dedicated variation pattern allocation table can be appropriately provided according to the ceiling privilege. For example, in the case of finite probability variation and infinite probability variation, there is a “variation pattern distribution table dedicated to heaven probability variation”, and in the case of finite probability and infinite probability variation, there is a “variation pattern distribution table dedicated to heaven probability variation”. In the case of this embodiment, an example is shown in which a variation pattern distribution table common to the time saving mode is selected in order to give "finite time saving" as a ceiling privilege. Further, although not shown, the variation pattern apportionment table is provided with variation pattern apportionment tables corresponding to set values (settings 1 to 6). That is, depending on the setting value, the probability of drawing one or more specific variation patterns may differ, and the setting guess element can be given according to the appearance rate of the effect related to the variation pattern. there is

As shown in FIGS. 24 to 27, in each variation pattern distribution table, one or more types of variation patterns are included in the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), the number of suspended balls (operated suspension used for the current variation display operation, It is determined in association with the number of existing active pending balls (excluding balls), pattern lottery results, and random numbers for fluctuation patterns. As for the types of variation patterns, various variation patterns are provided as illustrated. The winning expectation is related as follows. The relationship between the reaches of the same kind is "N reach A<N reach B" between N reaches, and "SP reach A<SP reach B<SP reach C" between SP reachs. The relationship between different types of reach is the relationship of "N reach A<N reach B<SP reach A<SP reach B<SP reach C<special reach". In addition, when pseudo-ren or other notice effects appear in combination, the winning expectation will change, for example, "SP reach B < pseudo 3 + SP reach A". May exceed reach B or C. The fanning reach is mainly provided as a special reach that is selected when there is a prize in the special figure 2 at the time of hitting left in the normal mode. In the illustration, N reach is exemplified without pseudo-ream, but in reality, N reach with pseudo-ream (for example, pseudo 2 + N reach A, pseudo 2 + N reach B, etc.) is included, and pseudo 3 or more , the occurrence of SP reach is determined.

The determination processing method of the variation pattern is basically the same as the previously described look-ahead variation pattern determination (random number determination processing (step S320 in FIG. 11) at the time of start-up winning). Here, with reference to the variation pattern allocation table, any one variation pattern is determined according to the variation pattern random number value (variation pattern designation command data shown in FIGS. 24 to 27 COM2 is obtained). Then, when the variation pattern is determined, the corresponding variation time is determined (see the "TIME" column in the drawing). This variable time (execution time of the symbol variable display game) is set in the "special symbol role product operation timer" which is the timer management area of the area RAM.

The information about the variation pattern determined in this manner includes at least another win/loss lottery result (in the case of this embodiment, detailed pattern lottery result information is included in the decorative pattern designation command), Current game state, variable time information, execution designation information of specific notice effect (presence or absence of reach effect and its type, pseudo-continuous designation information, etc.) can be included. The main control unit 20 creates a “variation pattern specification command” (“COM2” shown in FIGS. 24 to 27) that allows the content to be specified, and transmits this to the effect control unit 24. FIG. The information included in the variation pattern designation command is used by the effect control unit 24 when determining various effects (announcement effect during change, setting suggestion effect during change) to appear during the current pattern change display game. used for

(Regarding characteristic elements related to fluctuation patterns)
Here, the characteristic elements related to the variation pattern will be described, focusing on having multiple types of ST modes and having a ceiling function.

The fluctuation states (high-speed, medium-speed, low-speed fluctuation states) in each game mode are realized exclusively by the fluctuation pattern group and its selection rate defined in the losing fluctuation pattern apportionment table shown in FIGS. Therefore, it is possible to change the variation state under each game mode depending on what kind of variation pattern type is defined in the variation pattern allocation table. For example, if you refer to the "losing variation pattern distribution table for ST" shown in FIG. The shortest variation pattern with the shortest variation time of 2 s is selected with a high probability. Also, in the middle of the ST and the end of the ST, a variation pattern with a longer variation time (normal variation 3s, normal variation 4s) is selected with a high probability. realize the state. Also, as shown in FIG. 27, at the time of losing, reach is likely to be selected in the order of ST end, ST middle, ST early stage mode (in the case of this embodiment, the reach selectivity is zero in the early stage of ST), and its The variation time is also relatively long, and from this point, the average completion time of the symbol variation display game is relatively long in this order of ST early stage, ST middle stage, and ST end stage mode. It has become.

Also, in the ST early stage mode, only the normal variation type is selected at the time of losing, and only the reach (direct hit reach) is selected at the time of winning. In other words, during the early stage of the ST (within 1 to 25 games), it becomes "accurate" when the reach is applied. In addition, in this embodiment, when winning during the ST early stages, the common variation pattern distribution table "FB9" is selected regardless of the special symbol type, the number of balls that are suspended in operation, and the hit type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured such that different variation pattern distribution tables can be selected according to the jackpot type, such as ST middle stage mode and ST final stage mode.

Also, by utilizing the fact that there are a plurality of types of ST modes, the following configurations (I) and (II) are possible.
(I) A configuration may be adopted in which a Tcode dedicated to the final round of the ST mode is provided, and a specific fluctuation pattern (final swing fluctuation) can be selected for the final round. The Tcode dedicated to the final round can be provided in at least one ST mode of the ST early stage mode, the ST middle stage mode, and the ST final stage mode. For example, "ST early final stage A, ST middle stage final stage A, ST final stage final stage A" shown in notes 2 to 4 in FIG. ST early stage final stage B, ST middle stage final stage B, ST end stage final stage B" and so on. In this case, the following effects can be produced. Representatively, taking the final game of ST early stage mode (25th game in ST) as an example, in the final game, "ST early stage final fanning A" is selected at the time of the big hit, and "ST early stage final fanning A" is selected at the time of loss. B" is selected. At this time, in both of the symbol variation display games related to the final ST opening A and B, a common effect is displayed for a predetermined time from the start of the game (until the predetermined variation time elapses from the start of the game), Arouse expectations as to whether it is a loss or a big hit. Then, if it is a loss, it will stop at the "losing pattern (separate pattern)" without applying the reach, and if it is a big hit, it will be stopped at the "matching pattern (hit pattern)" (in this example, the reach is It will be accurate when it is applied). It should be noted that the fluctuation time of the final blow A (at the time of winning) and the final blow B (at the time of loss) may be the same fluctuation time, but the fluctuation time at the time of the big hit is set to be longer than at the time of loss, and after the reach production, the winning is decided. Appears a specific production such as a blessing production to bless, a promotion display from even pattern matching to odd pattern matching, or a non-promotion display from even pattern matching to even pattern matching depending on the jackpot type won. It is preferable to let

(II) When the winning jackpot type (one or more specific jackpot types may be used) is kept in a hidden state for the purpose of production, and the transition destination game state is kept in a hidden state (in the production during the symbol variation display game and the production during the winning) , When the winning jackpot type is hidden state), for example, in the final game of the ST early stage mode (ST 25th game), at the time of losing, the ST early stage final incitement is used to determine whether the ST mode ends or continues Let Kano's "continuous fanning production" appear. For example, when the current game mode is the ST25 mode, as a result of the continuous fanning performance, a continuation failure performance for informing ST discontinuation appears, and when the current game mode is ST75 or ST100 mode, ST continuation is reported. Continuing success performance is made to appear.

Both of the configurations (I) and (II) described above can increase the player's sense of tension in the ST final game and improve the fun of the game in the ST mode. Further, the above-mentioned "final swing variation" may be configured to be selectable in all ST modes or part of ST modes. However, in the ST mode, which has a "high-speed fluctuation state" such as the ST early stage mode, it is preferable to configure the final swing fluctuation to be selectable. In the case of the "high-speed fluctuation state", if the game continues to lose without winning a big win, the ST (probability change state) will end in a blink of an eye, and the player's disappointment will increase. Therefore, it is preferable to allow the player to select the "final swing change" in the final round so as to maintain the player's sense of tension in order to improve the fun of the game. In addition, it is also possible to continuously select the "final hype" from the game one or more games before the final game, not limited to the final ST game. For example, during the three games from ST23 to ST25, the "Final Encouragement" is continuously selected.

(Regarding the fluctuation pattern related to the ceiling mode)
Also, referring to the losing fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 26, in the ceiling mode, as shown in the "ceiling" column of the illustration, regardless of the special figure type and the number of operation pending balls, common "ceiling fluctuation" is selected. However, in the case of this embodiment, since there are multiple types of loss types, "common ceiling fluctuation" is selected regardless of "special figure type, number of balls in operation, and loss type". The reason for doing so is as follows. First, at the time of reaching the ceiling, it is preferable to make a common ceiling effect appear regardless of at least the special figure type and the number of operation pending balls, and to notify the ceiling activation (granting of the ceiling privilege). Secondly, preparing a plurality of types of variation pattern distribution tables for one ceiling game (one rotation only) and presenting effects based on them increases the control load and reduces the control load. This is because it is not preferable from the viewpoint of Also, in the case of winning, as in the case of "losing" described above, the following configuration is adopted from the viewpoint of performance and control load reduction. As already explained, in the ceiling game (the 1000th game), when the jackpot is won by chance, instead of displaying the effect related to the ceiling effect mode, the normal effect mode (for example, the normal mode It is preferable to display the effect at the time of winning (in the medium mode or the omen mode) (see the above description of “7-4-1. About the effect during the ceiling mode”). Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in the "ceiling" column of the losing variation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. "FB2" is selected from among the distribution tables FB1 to FB4. Any of FB1 to FB4 may be used instead of "FB2".

(Regarding fluctuation patterns related to omen mode)
Also, focusing on the "precursor mode" of the losing fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. , the game mode with the fastest average digestion time). This takes into consideration the state of mind of the player. It is thought that many of the players, when approaching the ceiling, have a strong desire to "get to the ceiling as soon as possible" and "want to get the ceiling privilege as soon as possible." Therefore, in this embodiment, the average digestion time during the precursor mode is sped up. In addition, in the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24, when the jackpot is won in the omen mode, the hit variation pattern distribution tables FB1 to FB4 common to the general mode are adopted. Not limited to this, a hit variation pattern allocation table dedicated to the portent mode may be provided. For example, it is possible to provide a "forecast hit variation" as a winning variation exclusively for the omen mode (see Note 2 "Omen hit variation" in FIG. 24).

Also, if the final game in Omen Mode is "losing", a specific variation pattern (variation pattern with a relatively long variation time) is selected in order to make the above-mentioned "preliminary launch guidance notification effect" appear. It may be a possible configuration (see Remark 2 “precursor final fluctuation” in FIG. 26). This pre-launch guidance notification effect is an effect that instructs "how to hit" in the game before the game in which the state with electric sapo occurs. Or a game that causes a reduction in time), or instructing "left hitting" in the game without an electric sapo, that is, the actual presence of an electric sapo. It is different in character from the notification effect that instructs how to hit in the game in which none occurs. In this respect, the pre-launch guidance notification effect is a unique effect of a gaming machine equipped with a ceiling privilege.

Returning to the description of FIG. 12 again. After finishing the special symbol variation pattern creation process of step S413, next, the in-varying flag corresponding to the current variation start side is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S414). The above "fluctuation flag" is a flag indicating which of the special symbols 1 and 2 is fluctuating, and when the flag is ON (5AH), it indicates that the special symbol is fluctuating, and the When the flag is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that the special symbol is stopped. In this embodiment, "special symbol 1 fluctuating flag" corresponding to special figure 1 and "special symbol 2 fluctuating flag" corresponding to special figure 2 are handled. For example, if the special figure 1 side is the current processing target (variation start side), the special symbol 1 fluctuating flag is set to ON, and the special symbol 2 fluctuating flag is set to OFF.

Next, a decorative design designation command capable of specifying the design lottery result information obtained in the special stop design creation process of step S411 is acquired, and this is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S415). The decorative design specification command includes information about the special design type and winning type (design lottery result) on the fluctuation side. This decorative pattern designation command is mainly composed of a combination of decorative patterns when forming a ready-to-win state (symbol types with ready-to-win patterns as constituent elements), a combination of decorative patterns to be finally stopped and displayed (decorative stop pattern), It is used when performing a notice effect corresponding to the winning type in the symbol variation display game. Upon receiving the variation pattern designation command and the decorative design designation command, the performance control unit 24 starts the current decorative design variation display game based on the information contained in these commands, and controls the appearance of various performances during variation. do.

Then, as the fluctuation start time setting processing, the special symbol operation status is switched to "varying (02H)" (02H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H is stored in the judgment random number storage area (cleared to zero) (step S416). ).

As described above, when this special symbol variation start process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 10 is performed, and thus the special symbol variation display is started. As a result, the special symbol management process (step S093) is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessary product management process (step S095) of FIG.

(Regarding the case where a setting error occurs: processing route from S409 to S411)
Returning to the description of the determination processing in step S409, the details of the processing when it is determined in step S409 that the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH), that is, when it is determined that a setting error has occurred will be described. do.

In this embodiment, in the determination process of step S409, if it is determined that the setting error flag is ON state, the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric auditors (winning lottery) is skipped, and the special stop of step S411 Proceed to design creation processing. That is, when a setting abnormality error occurs, the win-lose lottery at the start of fluctuation is not executed, and the win-lose lottery result of this time is always processed as "losing" (forced losing control). In addition, in the case of a setting abnormality error, it may be configured such that an error-specific variation pattern is selected, or an existing specific variation pattern may be selected. However, considering that a serious error called a setting error occurs, it is preferable to select only normal variation instead of reach variation.

<A. Processing during special symbol fluctuation: Fig. 10>
Next, the processing during special symbol fluctuation (step S307) shown in FIG. 10 will be described.

In the special symbol variation process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time T set in the special symbol role product operation timer has elapsed. If the variation time T has not passed (variation time T≠0), the special symbol is in the process of being varied, so nothing is done and the processing during special symbol variation is exited. When the fluctuation time T of the special symbol has passed (variation time T=0), a "variation stop command (BF01H)" indicating that the fluctuation of the special symbol has ended is transmitted to the performance control unit 24 as a production control command. . When receiving the variation stop command, the performance control part 24 grasps that the special symbol variation display game has ended after the variation time of the special symbols has passed, and stops and displays (determines) the decorative symbols being displayed in a variable manner. As a result, when the special symbol variation display game is terminated, the decorative symbol variation display game is also terminated.

Next, as a setting process when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped, the special symbol confirmation signal output time (eg, 100 ms) and the confirmation display time (eg, 500 ms) are stored in the corresponding area of the area RAM, and the special symbol operation status is set. Switch to "confirming (03H)" (store 03H in the special symbol operation status) and store the OFF state in the special symbol fluctuating flag. Then, when the setting process at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol is completed, the process during the special symbol fluctuation is exited. The above-mentioned "special symbol determination signal output time" is a margin time for ensuring output time of the special symbol determination signal for notifying that the special symbol has been determined and displayed from the frame external terminal board 21 to the hall computer HC. is. Also, the "fixed display time" is the time (stop display time) during which the stop display is maintained when the variable display of the special symbols is finished and the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

After exiting the above special symbol changing process, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 10 is performed, the special symbol management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessary product management process of step S095 of FIG.

<22. Special symbol confirmation time processing (fluctuation stop processing): FIGS. 16A and 16B>
Next, the processing during the special symbol confirmation time (step S308) will be described. 16A and 16B are flowcharts showing the details of the special symbol confirmation time process (step S308) in FIG.

In FIGS. 16A and 16B, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol auditors product operation timer is zero (step S471). In the special symbol role product operation timer here, "fixed display time" is set (see step S307 of the above special symbol fluctuation process). Until the special symbol role product operation timer becomes zero (step S471: NO), nothing is done and the special symbol confirmation time processing is exited.

If the special symbol role product operation timer reaches zero (step S471: YES), it is assumed that this special symbol variation display game is over, and the special symbol operation status is switched to "waiting (01H)" (special symbol operation 01H is stored in the status) (step S472), and the current game state information is stored in the game state determination area of the RAM (step S473).

Next, a big hit determination flag is obtained, and the state of the big hit determination flag is determined (step S474).

(If the jackpot judgment flag is ON)
When it is determined in step S474 that the big hit determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S474:=5AH), various setting processes at the time of stopping the big hit pattern are performed (step S475). Here, as shown in the figure, the big hit determination flag is set to the OFF state (00H), the condition device operation flag is set to the ON state (5AH) assuming that the big hit is won, and the low probability and the electric support are set during the big hit game. Set stateless state (clear various flags and counters). Also, the ceiling flag and the ceiling activation flag are set to the OFF state (00H), and the ceiling counter is cleared (00H).

(When the jackpot judgment flag is in the OFF state)
In the determination of step S474, if the big hit determination flag is OFF (00H) (step S474: ≠5AH), then the small hit determination flag is acquired and the state of the small hit determination flag is determined (step S476). If the small hit determination flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S476: ≠5AH), that is, if it is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the process proceeds to step S478.

On the other hand, when the small hit determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S476:=5AH), various setting processes are performed when the small hit design is stopped (step S477). Here, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the small-hit determination flag and 5AH (ON state) is stored in the small-hit medium flag as various setting processes (processing before the start of the small-hit game) when the small-hit symbols are stopped. After completing the various setting processes at the time of stopping the small winning symbols, the process proceeds to step S478.

When proceeding to the process of step S478, it is determined whether or not the special symbol time saving number counter (remaining time saving number) is zero (step S478). When the special symbol time saving number counter is zero (step S478: YES), the process proceeds to step S483.

On the other hand, if the special symbol time saving number counter is not zero (step S478: NO), the special symbol time saving number counter is subtracted by 1 (step S479), and the special symbol time saving number counter after the subtraction is It is determined whether or not it is zero (step S480).

If the special symbol time saving counter after subtraction is not zero (step S480: NO), since the special symbol time saving state end count has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything. On the other hand, if the special symbol time saving number counter after subtraction is zero (step S480: YES), it is assumed that the number of times the special symbol time saving state has ended has been reached, and the time saving end setting process is performed (step S481).

(Setting process at time of time saving end: step S481)
Here, as the setting process at the time of the time saving end, the electric chew support function (normal pattern probability variable function, normal pattern time saving function, and open extension function) is set to OFF state (general electric role open extended state flag, normal pattern time saving Set the state flag and the normal symbol probability change state flag to 00H respectively), and set the transition to the "no electric sapo state". In addition, in order to terminate the operation of the special symbol time saving function, the special symbol time saving function is set to the OFF state (set the special symbol time saving state flag to 00H), and the game state notification LED output number (state notification of the composite display device 38c Data) stores 00H that specifies a non-special symbol time-saving state (in the case of "01H", special symbol time-saving state designation).

The case where the "setting process at the end of the time saving" of step S481 is executed is the case where the game mode shifts from the "time saving mode" to the normal mode (general mode), specifically, the internal game state is the "time saving state". This is a case of transition from to "normal state". Therefore, here, as the game shifts to the normal state (general mode) from the next game, an initial value (999 times) is set in the ceiling counter so as to start counting the number of remaining ceiling games. In this embodiment, the game in which the ceiling counter value becomes zero is the game immediately before the ceiling game (the 999th game). , in the game state transition preparation process (step S412 in FIG. 12), the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state (5AH), and data for designating the ceiling privilege is stored in each state buffer (FIG. 15 steps S915 to S917, S914). Then, in the ceiling activation management process (step S421 in FIG. 12) at the start of the next game (ceiling game), the data in the state buffer is read out and set to various flags and counters related to game state designation. (S921 to S926 in FIG. 14). As a result, the ceiling privilege is given when the ceiling game starts. In addition, the ceiling counter may be set to "1000" as an initial value. For example, it is possible to directly set specified data related to the ceiling privilege to various flags and counters without going through the state buffer.

(Control processing in the case of granting the ceiling privilege with the end of the game as a trigger)
Here, in the case of providing the ceiling privilege at the end of the game (when the symbols are stopped), as already described, the subroutine "ceiling activation management process (step S421)" After the final processing (step S495 described later) of the special symbol confirmation time processing related to the end of the display game, the ceiling activation management processing (step S421) may be executed. In this case, when the ceiling counter is set to 999 as in the present embodiment, the ceiling privilege is given at the end of 999 games, and when 1000 is set to the ceiling counter, the ceiling privilege is given at the end of 1000 games. In any case, the specific event related to the game (here, the number of times of loss in the normal state) is counted, and when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, zero), the ceiling function activation trigger or ceiling privilege It may be configured so that it can be given. By adopting the processing method of the present embodiment (see FIGS. 12 to 16B), it is possible to set the ceiling trigger to be triggered at the end of the game, whereas the old model used the trigger to trigger the ceiling at the start of the game. There are advantages in that design changes can be made easily and compatibility between old and new models can be enhanced.

When the setting process at the end of the time saving in step S481 is finished, then the game state update process is executed (step S482). Here, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "05H" of the time saving mode to "00H" of the general mode. The updated game state information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by a game state designation command in step S495, which will be described later. Therefore, when the setting process at the end of the time saving of step S481 is executed, the game state designation command transmitted in step S495 described later includes information designating the "general mode", and by this game state designation command The effect control unit 24 grasps that the time saving mode (time saving state) has ended in the current game, and grasps that the next game will be shifted to the general mode (normal state). As a result, in the next symbol variation display game, a special symbol variation pattern based on the "general mode" is selected, and an effect under the "general effect mode" is displayed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol probability variation number counter (remaining ST number) is zero (step S483). When the special symbol probability variation counter is zero (step S483: YES), the process proceeds to step S488 without doing anything. On the other hand, if the special symbol probability variation number counter is not zero (step S483: NO), the special symbol probability variation number counter is subtracted by 1 (step S484), and the special symbol probability variation after the subtraction It is determined whether or not the number counter is zero (step S485).

If the special symbol probability variation number counter after subtraction is not zero (step S485: NO), since the ST number has not ended, the process proceeds to step S488 without doing anything. However, when the special symbol probability variation number counter after subtraction is zero (step S485: YES), it is assumed that the number of times of ST has ended, and the setting process at the time of probability variation end is executed (step S486). Here, as a setting process at the time of ending the variable probability state, the function related to the variable probability state is set to the OFF state to end the variable probability state. However, the processing contents differ according to the value of the special symbol time saving number counter. Details will be described below.

(1) "When the special symbol probability variable number counter after subtraction is zero and the special symbol time saving number counter is not zero", in this case, the ST number becomes zero in this game and the ST mode ends, Since the number of times of time saving remains, it is a case where it is shifted to the time saving mode from the next game. That is, when 25 ST times are completed during the ST25 mode, or when 75 ST times are completed during the ST75 mode ("JTTBL-4, 5" in the game state transition table shown in FIG. 22 is reference). Therefore, in this case, only the special symbol probability variation function is set to the OFF state (00H) (00H is stored in the special symbol probability variation state flag), the transition from the probability variation state to the time saving state is set, and the game state number YJ is set to "02H. (time saving state)”. When this process is executed in ST25, ST75, and ST100 modes, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated in subsequent step S491.

(2) On the other hand, "when the special symbol probability variable number counter after subtraction is zero and the special symbol time saving number counter is also zero", in this case, the ST number becomes zero in this game, and the time saving number This is a case of zero, that is, a case where the ST100 mode is stayed, but the ST100 mode ends in the current game (see "JTTBL-3" in the game state transition table shown in FIG. 22). Therefore, in this case, as a process required to end the probability variable state, the electric chew support function (normal symbol probability variable function, normal symbol time saving function, and open extension function) is set to OFF state (normal electric role open extension state flag, 00H is stored in the normal symbol time saving state flag and the normal symbol probability change state flag), and the special symbol time saving function and the special symbol probability change function are turned off (00H is stored in the special symbol time saving state flag and the special symbol probability change state flag respectively. ), store the game state notification LED output number 00H, set the initial value to the ceiling counter, and update the game state number YJ to "00H (normal state)". It should be noted that the same applies when ending the latent probability state (when a finite latent probability jackpot is provided). As a result, the ST100 mode (probability variable state) is ended, and the next game is shifted to the normal mode (general mode). In addition, in the case of ST100 mode, if the special symbol probability variable number counter becomes zero, the special symbol time saving number counter will also be zero (if the ST number is zero in this game, the time saving number will also be zero ), In the above "setting process at the end of time saving (step S481)" that is executed when the special symbol time saving number counter reaches zero, the function related to the time saving state such as the electric chew support function is set to OFF Therefore, in this process, only the special symbol probability variation function is turned off, and all functions related to the probability variation state (special symbol probability variation function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability variation function, normal symbol time saving function, and open extension function) may be set to OFF. Also, the setting of the ceiling counter may be set to the initial value (999 times) in the "setting process at the end of time saving (step S481)", or may be set in this process.

When the setting process at the end of probability variation in step S486 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the special symbol variation counter is zero (step S488). The determination processing of the special symbol variation number counter here is mainly monitoring of the switching game (update game) of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) in the ST mode.

If the special symbol variation number counter is zero (step S488: YES), nothing is done and the process is exited during this special symbol confirmation time. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation number counter is not zero (step S488: NO), the special symbol variation number counter is subtracted by 1 (step S489), and the special symbol variation number counter after the subtraction is zero (step S490).

If the special symbol variation count counter after the subtraction is not zero (step S490: NO), it is determined that it is not the update game of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), and nothing is done, and the process during the special symbol confirmation time is exited.

When the special symbol variation count counter after the subtraction is zero (step S489: YES), it is assumed that an update game of variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) has arrived, and game state update processing is executed (step S491). Here, update processing of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) in the ST mode is performed. The fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated when (α) ST early stage mode ends, (β) ST middle stage mode ends, (γ) ST final stage mode ends, etc. . More precisely, update processing is performed according to the ST25, ST75, and ST100 modes.

In the case of ST25 mode, since it shifts to the time saving mode when the ST early game mode ends, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "02H" of the ST early game mode to "05H" of the time saving mode.

In the case of the ST75 mode, when the ST early stage mode ends, it is shifted to the ST middle stage mode (first update), so at this time, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is changed from "02H" in the ST early stage mode to ST middle stage mode to "03H". Then, when the ST middle stage mode ends, it is shifted to the time saving mode (second update), so at this time, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "03H" in the ST middle stage mode to "05H" in the time saving mode. do.

In the case of the ST100 mode, when the ST early stage mode ends, the mode is shifted to the ST middle stage mode (first update). ” to “03H” in ST middle stage mode. After that, when the ST middle stage mode ends, the transition is made to the ST end stage mode (second update). update to. Then, when the ST endgame mode ends, it shifts to the ST endgame mode (third update), so at this time, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is changed from "04H" in the ST endgame mode to "00H" in the general mode. Update.

The process of step S491 described above works as a variation pattern mode update means for updating (changing) the selection condition of the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the establishment of the predetermined change condition.

Next, when the gaming state update process of step S491 is finished, next, special figure fluctuation number counter update process is performed (step S492). Here, (1) processing to set the duration of the ST middle stage mode (ST number of times 50 times) after the ST number of times 25 times of the ST early stage mode is digested (processing of setting the value of the special symbol variation number counter 2) , (2) After 50 times of ST in the ST middle stage mode are digested, the process of setting the duration of the ST end mode (25 times of ST) (processing of setting the value of the special symbol variation counter 3) is performed. (For the value of the special symbol variation counter to be updated, refer to the special symbol variation counter 1 to 3 buffer columns of the game state transition table in FIG. 22). In this embodiment, the ST early stage, ST middle stage, and ST final stage modes are realized by the processing of steps S488 to S491.

Next, a portent mode transition management process is executed (step S493). In the portent mode transition management process, the ceiling counter is checked to determine whether or not the value of the ceiling counter is the portent mode transition trigger game number. In the case of this embodiment, since the portent mode is entered from the 990th game (see FIG. 7), when the ceiling counter N indicates the 989th game in the current game (ceiling counter N=10), the transition to the portent mode is made. Perform setting processing. Specifically, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "00H" of the general mode to "01H" of the precursor mode. As a result, the game is shifted to the portent mode from the 990th game of the next game, the variation pattern of the special symbols based on the portent mode is selected, and the performance under the portent performance mode appears.

When the portent mode transition management process of step S493 is completed, next, the game state information transmission process is executed (step S495). This game state information transmission process transmits a game state designation command, like the game state information transmission process (step S408) during the special symbol variation start process shown in FIG. However, the game state designation command transmitted here is information regarding the game state at the end of the game, that is, information including the contents updated in steps S482, S491, S494, and the like. Therefore, according to the game state designation command transmitted in this process, the effect control unit 24 can grasp whether or not the game state transition occurs, and control the transition of the effect mode at the end of the current game. For example, even if the 989th game is not started after the 989th game is finished, it is possible to switch and display the daytime background of the general presentation mode to the night background of the omen mode immediately after the 989th game is finished.

When the game state information transmission process of step S495 is completed, the special symbol confirmation time process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 10 is performed, and the special symbol management process (step S093) is exited. Then, the process proceeds to the special electric accessary product management process (step S095) in FIG.

<23. Special electric accessory management process: Fig. 17>
Next, the special electric accessary product management process (step S095) in FIG. 9 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric accessary product management process in step S095.

In FIG. 17, the CPU 201 first determines the state of the flag during a small hit (step S501). When the small hit medium flag is ON (step S501:=5AH), small hit processing is performed (step S504), and this special electric auditors product management processing is exited. In this small-hit process, necessary processing for controlling the small-hit game operation is executed.

When the small hitting flag is OFF (step S501: ≠5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S502). When the conditional device operation flag is OFF (step S502: ≠5AH), in this case, it is not during the small winning game (step S501: ≠5AH), and it is not during the big winning game, so do nothing and this special electric accessory Exit management processing.

When the conditional device operation flag is ON (step S502:=5AH), the processing corresponding to the special electric auditors product operation status (00H to 04H) is performed (step S503: special electric auditors product status branching process). It should be noted that the "special electric role product operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special variable winning device 52, this status value is changed according to the processing state, the special electric role product operation status storage area of the area RAM stored in In the special electric accessary product operation status, "Start processing (00H)" which designates that it is in a standby state before the start of the big hit game, "In operation start processing ( 01H)", "in operation (02H)" to designate that the round game is being executed, and "continuing determination (03H)" to designate that it is being determined whether or not to continue the next round game. , "Jack end processing (04H)" specifying that the end processing is in progress at the end of the big win game is included.

In the special electric auditors product operation status branching process of step S503, the special electric auditors product operation status value is "start processing (00H)" "operation start processing (01H)" "operating (02H)" "continuing determination ( 03H)” and “during jackpot end processing (04H)”, one of steps S505 to S509 is executed according to the status value. These processes are processes for controlling the execution of a big hit game, and through the processes of steps S505 to S509, a winning game corresponding to various winnings is realized. The processing contents of steps S505 to S509 will be described below.

<Big hit game control process (steps S505 to S509)>
(9-1. Jackpot Start Processing)
The "jackpot start process" in step S505 will be described. At the start of the jackpot game, the special electric accessary product operation status is set to the initial value "in process of starting (00H)". Therefore, when a "jackpot" is achieved, this "jackpot start process" is executed first.

When entering the jackpot start process, the CPU 201 first sets the accessory continuous operation device operation flag to the ON state as a setting process (setting process at the start) necessary when starting the jackpot game. As a result, the continuous operation of the special electric accessory (round game) becomes a permissible state. Then, the special electric accessary product operation status is updated to "operation start processing (01H)", and 01H that specifies the first 1R is set to the "continuous number counter" that counts the number of rounds. Next, according to the hit type (special symbol determination data) won this time, "maximum number of rounds" corresponding to this big hit is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM in the area, and "start interval time" is added to the special symbol accessory operation timer. set. "Start interval time (start INT)" means that after the special symbol confirmation display time has passed (see step S471 in FIG. 16A) and the jackpot is confirmed, until the special variable winning device 52 operates (1R round until the start of the game), and refers to the time width that defines the opening effect section.

Next, a "jackpot start command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and this jackpot start process is exited. In addition to the role of instructing the start of the opening effect, the "jackpot start command" includes information that can specify the type of this jackpot and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. It is also used when determining a series of hit effects (opening effect, round effect, round end effect, ending effect, etc.) corresponding to each jackpot type. Thus, a jackpot game is started.

(9-2. Special electric accessories operation start processing)
Next, the "special electric accessary product operation start process" of step S506 will be described.

When entering the special electric role product operation start process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol role product operation timer is zero. The interval time before round start is set in the special symbol role product operation timer here. As this interval time, in the first round (1Rth), the "start interval time (start INT)" set in the "jackpot start process (step S505)" is monitored, but after the 2Rth, this process is monitored. When passing (step S506), the "interval time before opening", specifically, the interval time between rounds (INT between R) from the end of the current round game to the start of the next round game be monitored. Since the current round game has not ended until the special symbol role product operation timer reaches zero, nothing is done and the special electric role product operation start processing is exited.

On the other hand, if the special symbol role product operation timer is zero, that is, the interval time before opening (in the case of the 1Rth, the start interval time) has passed, the jackpot type (special symbol determination data) and the current round number (continuous number counter value) to set the opening/closing operation pattern of the large winning opening 50 (large winning opening opening/closing operation setting process). Here, the large winning opening opening and closing operation time (maximum opening time) is stored in the special symbol role product operation timer, and the solenoid control data for controlling the large winning opening solenoid 52c (the large winning opening that is executed corresponding to the number of rounds) Winning gate opening/closing operation pattern data) is set.

In addition, along with the operation for starting the opening of the large winning opening, a large winning opening opening command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 . This "big prize opening opening command" includes the current round number information, and is used by the effect control section 24 when displaying the mid-round effect corresponding to the number of rounds. Then, the special electric role product operation status is switched to "in operation (02H)", and this special electric role product management process is exited. As a result, the big winning opening 50 is opened up to the upper limit of the opening/closing operation time of the big winning opening, and the current round game is started.

(9-3. Processing during operation of special electric accessories)
Next, the "special electric accessary product in operation process" of step S507 will be described.

When entering the special electric role product in operation process, the CPU 201 first monitors whether the number of winning balls into the big winning hole 50 has reached the maximum number of winning prizes, and if the maximum number of winning prizes has been reached, a special symbol combination Clear the object operation timer to zero. As a result, the timer value set in the "special electric accessory operation start process (step S506)" is forcibly set to zero, and the maximum winning number is reached, so that the large winning opening 50 that is open will be closed. Also, here, every time a prize is won in the special prize opening 50, a “special prize prize prize command” is transmitted to the effect control section 24.例文帳に追加The special prize opening winning command includes information on the occurrence of prizes for the special prize opening and information on the number of prize balls (set value information may also be included), and a prize to inform that the player has won the special prize opening 50. In addition to being used for production, it is also used for appearance control of setting suggestion production using prize winning production. For example, when there is an over-win that exceeds the maximum number of wins, a special over-win-win effect is produced in place of the normal over-win-win effect according to the appearance rate determined according to the set value.

In addition, until the special symbol role product operation timer becomes zero, that is, until the large winning opening operation time (maximum opening time) elapses or the maximum number of winnings is reached, do nothing, It exits the processing during special electric accessory operation as it is.

If the maximum winning number is reached or the maximum opening time has passed and the special symbol accessory operation timer has become zero, this round game is considered to have ended, and the special electric accessory operation status is set to "continuing determination (03H)", and stores the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) in the special symbol role product operation timer. This "remaining ball ejection time" refers to the extra time for discharging the remaining balls inside the large winning opening after the closing of the large winning opening. In addition, an inter-round interval command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 along with the closing of the big winning opening (end of the round game). This "inter-round interval command" includes round game end information and current round number information, and the effect (inter-round interval effect) during the inter-round interval (R-interval INT) until the next round is controlled by the effect control unit 24. Used when manifesting. By the above, this special electric accessary product in operation processing is exited.

(9-4. Special electric accessory operation continuation determination process)
Next, the "special electric auditors product operation continuation determination process" of step S508 will be described.

When entering the special electric auditors product operation continuation determination process, the CPU 201 first determines whether the special symbol auditors product operation timer is zero. Since the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) after the closing of the big winning opening is set in the special symbol role product operation timer here (see step S507), it is determined whether or not this remaining ball discharge time has elapsed. be done. Until the special symbol role product operation timer reaches zero, nothing is done and the special electric role product operation continuation determination process is exited.

When the special symbol role product operation timer reaches zero (remaining ball discharge time elapsed), the value of the continuous number counter is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the current number of rounds has reached the maximum number of rounds. If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached, as a process for continuing the round game, add 1 (+1) to the consecutive number counter, store the "interval time before opening" in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and special electric role The object operation status is switched to "operation start processing (01H)".

On the other hand, when the current number of rounds reaches the maximum number of rounds, as a setting process at the end of the final round, the "end interval time (end INT)" is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the special electric accessory is stored. The operation status is switched to "finishing (04H)". The above-mentioned "end interval time" is an interval period from the end of the final round game to the end of the jackpot game after the remaining ball discharge time has passed, and refers to the time width that determines the ending effect period. .

Then, a "jackpot end command" instructing the start of the ending production is transmitted to the production control unit 24, and the special electric accessary product operation continuation determination process is exited. Thereby, the round game of the maximum round number is ended. In addition, the above-mentioned jackpot end command includes information about the current jackpot type and the game state at the time of winning, that is, information capable of specifying the game state after the jackpot game is finished. It is also used when determining the production mode of.

(9-5. Jackpot ending process: Fig. 18)
Next, the "jackpot ending process" in step S509 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the details of the jackpot ending process.

In FIG. 18, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol auditors product operation timer is zero (step S591). Since the end interval time (end INT) is set in the special symbol role product operation timer here, it is determined here whether or not this end interval time has elapsed. Until the special symbol auditors product operation timer reaches zero (step S591: NO), nothing is done and this big hit ending process is exited.

On the other hand, if the special symbol auditors product operation timer becomes zero (elapsed end interval time) (step S591: YES), the state flag setting process is executed (step S592). Here, each value of the state buffer set in the "game state transition preparation process (step S412 in FIG. 12)" already described is set in the flag area or counter corresponding to the state buffer. Thereby, the game state after the jackpot game is specified.

Next, various setting processes at the end of the jackpot are executed (step S593). Here, various data used during the jackpot game control process (for example, flags and counter values used in steps S505 to S509) are cleared, the game state notification LED output number is updated, and the special electric auditors product operation status is Switch to "Start processing (00H)".

When the big-hit ending process is finished, a series of control processes relating to the big-hit game is finished, and the current big-hit game is finished. It should be noted that the series of control processing relating to the jackpot game explained above is the same as when the "forced hit" is provided by the ceiling privilege.

<19. Processing on the production control unit side: FIGS. 19 to 20>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 to 20, the effect control processing on the side of the effect control unit 24 of this embodiment will be described. The processing on the production control unit 24 side mainly includes predetermined main processing (production control side main processing: FIG. 19) and timer interrupt processing (production control side timer interrupt processing: 20).

<19. Effect control side main processing: Fig. 19>
FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing main processing on the side of the effect control section (main processing on the side of effect control). The effect control unit 24 starts main processing on the effect control side shown in FIG.

In the main process of the effect control side, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) first performs necessary initial setting process before starting the game operation (step S1001). Here, as the initial setting processing, for example, command reception interrupt setting, starting point return processing of the movable body role, initial setting of CTC, permission of timer interrupt, initial setting of register values inside the CPU including each part of the microcomputer, etc. I do.

After the initial setting process is finished, the main loop process of steps S1003 to S1011 is performed every predetermined time (16 ms) as the process during normal operation, and otherwise the effect software random number update process of step S01012 is repeatedly performed.

In the process of step S1002, the CPU 241 refers to the main loop update counter and determines whether or not the main loop update cycle (counter value>15) that triggers execution of the main loop process has arrived (step S1002). The main loop update counter is a counter that is incremented during the later-described effect control side timer interrupt process executed every 1 ms (see step S1057 in FIG. 20). In this embodiment, the main loop processing is performed every 16 ms or so. In the determination processing of step S1002, the main loop update counter value is determined, and if the value is greater than "15" (step S1002: YES), assuming that the execution timing of the main loop processing has arrived, the processing of steps S1003 to S1011 is executed. The lottery random number is updated (step S1012).

When the main loop update cycle has arrived (step S1002: YES), the main loop update counter is cleared to zero (step S1003), and then error processing is executed (step S1004). Here, the setting of the effect scenario for the error notification during the error, the error cancellation processing when the error is canceled, and the like are executed. Errors relating to the rendering means (movable body accessory error, voice IC error, etc.) are monitored here.

Next, a demonstration/power saving mode process is executed (step S1005). In this demonstration/power-saving mode process, setting processes necessary for the demonstration start waiting effect, the customer waiting effect, and the power saving mode are executed.

Then, effect switch input processing is executed (step S1007). In this production switch input process, the operation state of the operation means (production button 13, direction key 75) is monitored, and when an operation is detected, production control processing corresponding to the operation is executed. The input state of the operating means is monitored in the button input state update process (step S1052) in FIG. 20, which will be described later.

Next, command analysis processing is performed (step S1008). In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer, and if the effect control command is stored, this command is read, and effect processing corresponding to the read effect control command is executed. do. When an interrupt based on a strobe signal from the main control unit 20 occurs, command reception interrupt processing (not shown) is executed. By this command reception interruption processing, the production control command is acquired, the data is housed in the command reception buffer of RAM243.

For example, if at least the variation pattern designation command is received and stored in the reception buffer (in this embodiment, the variation pattern designation command and the decorative pattern designation command are received and stored in the reception buffer case), in the command analysis process, based on the information (fluctuation pattern information and winning information (or winning type information)) included in the command, one or more types of effect patterns are determined. The production pattern determined here works as a "parts production" as an element constituting the production scenario. Subsequently, a time schedule is determined as to when the determined production pattern (parts production) is to be displayed and with what production time width, and a production scenario is constructed according to this. The production scenario data is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243 . Various production patterns (parts production) incorporated in this production scenario are developed one after another or a plurality of them simultaneously, thereby realizing a "production scenario" in a broad sense.

Also, for example, when a "hold addition command" is received, effect processing is performed to make a look-ahead notice (a hold change notice and/or a change look-ahead notice) or a hold change notice for the ceiling (Fig. 32) appear. conduct.

After the command analysis process is completed, scenario update process is executed (step S1009). In this scenario updating process, the content of the timer required for executing the production scenario is updated, and the process of progressing the production scenario based on the timer value is executed. A typical example of the timer is an effect scenario timer that manages a time schedule regarding the generation timing of effects. For example, within the fluctuation period (decorative design fluctuation period) in which the decorative design is variably displayed, which is substantially the same period as the fluctuation period (special design fluctuation period) in which the special design is variably displayed, that time This timer manages a temporal schedule as to what effect pattern is to be displayed on the axis, with what time width, and by what effect means. Such a production scenario timer is also used in the LED drive data update process (step S1011) and the production accessory action update process (step S1053), which will be described later. Here, the effect scenario timer is monitored, and when the generation time of one effect arrives, the sound data for the speaker 46 and the liquid crystal command for image display control are created and stored in the designated area of the RAM 243. . Note that the LED data for the optical display device is created in the LED drive data update process (step S1011) described later, and the motor control data for the movable accessory is created in the performance accessory operation update process (step S1053) described later. be.

Next, sound output processing is performed (step S1010). In this sound output process, the sound data created in the scenario update process in step S1009 is acquired, and if there is sound data to be reproduced, phrases, volumes, etc. are changed based on the sound data set for each sound channel. The data is output to the sound control unit (sound source LSI), and a sound effect is produced from the speaker 46 through the sound control unit. As a result, a sound effect in line with the effect scenario is realized.

Next, LED drive data update processing is executed (step S1011). In this LED drive data update process, based on the performance scenario data and the performance scenario timer, LED data for the light display device such as the decorative lamp 13 and various LEDs for various performances is created, and the decorative lamp unit 45 and Lights up and blinks the LED. As a result, a light effect in accordance with the effect scenario is realized.

After the main loop process is finished as described above, the performance software random number update process of step S1012 is performed until the next main loop update period arrives.

<31. Production control side timer interrupt processing: Fig. 20>
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the timer interrupt processing on the effect control side will be described. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the effect control side timer interrupt processing. This effect control side timer interrupt process is started by an interrupt from the CTC at regular intervals (1 ms), and is executed by interrupting during execution of the effect control side main process.

In FIG. 20, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 saves the contents of the register to the stack area (step S1051), and then executes button input state update processing (step S1052). In this button input state update process, the input state of the operation detection signal from the operation means (the effect button 13, the direction key 75) is monitored, and when it is confirmed that the operation detection signal has been received, the detection information is stored in the RAM 243 as a predetermined value. Store in the area. This operation detection information is used in the scenario updating process (step S1009) in FIG. 19 when displaying player participation type effects, menu screens, information related to menu items, and the like. In this embodiment, it is also possible to detect a single press, a long press, repeated presses, and the like.

Then, a performance accessory operation update process is executed (step S1053). In this performance accessory operation update process, a process of creating motor control data for a movable accessory is performed based on the performance scenario data and the performance scenario timer.

Next, SOL/MOT output processing is performed (step S1054). In this SOL/MOT output process, the control data for the movable accessory created in the effect accessory operation update process is output to the drive control unit. The drive control unit outputs a control signal based on the control data to the movable body role product motor of the movable body role product to be operated to control the operation thereof. As a result, a movable object production using the movable object (clock-type object 80, flower-type object 90, etc.) in accordance with the production scenario is realized.

Next, liquid crystal command transmission processing is performed (step S1055). In this liquid crystal command transmission processing, if there is a liquid crystal command created in the scenario update processing (step S1009) of FIG. Execute display control. As a result, an image effect is realized in accordance with the effect scenario.

Next, RTC information acquisition processing is executed (step S1056). In this RTC information acquisition process, date and time information (RTC information) clocked by the RTC is acquired. This RTC information is used when presenting an effect based on the RTC information.

Next, the main loop update counter is incremented (step S1057). This main loop update counter is reset in step S1003 during the main processing of the effect control side described above, and is incremented in this processing. Therefore, when step S1057 is executed, the main loop update counter value is one of 0-15.

When the process of step S1057 is completed, the contents of the saved register are restored (step S1058), the timer interrupt process is terminated, and the effect control side main process is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

[Modified Example 1 of Privilege Grant Form: Fig. 33]
In the above embodiment, when a predetermined number of games are executed without winning a jackpot in the normal mode (at least when the internal game state is normal), the ceiling privilege is given. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the following application forms (α) to (ζ) can be applied.

<Grant form (α): Fig. 33 (a)>
(α) When the number of executed games is counted regardless of the game mode or internal game state, and the counted number of games reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, the 1000th game) without winning a jackpot. (see FIG. 33(a)). In the case of this configuration, not only the normal mode (normal state) but also the number of games executed during the time saving mode (time saving state) and the probability variable mode (variable probability state) are counted. Therefore, the ceiling privilege can be given purely according to how many games the player has been addicted to since the big hit this time.

<Grant form (β): Fig. 33 (b)>
(β) Count the number of games in the "game state with a low probability state (low probability game state)", and if the number of games counted is a predetermined number of games (for example, the 1000th game) without winning a big hit ) is reached, the ceiling privilege is given. In the case of this example, the number of games executed during a game state accompanied by a high probability state (high probability game state) is excluded from the count target. Here, the "game state with a low probability state" corresponds to "normal state" or "time saving state" when focusing on the internal game state, and "normal mode" or "time saving state" when focusing on the game mode mode” applies.

FIG. 33 (b) typically shows a time saving jackpot 1 (shift destination game state is time saving A), a probability variable jackpot 3 (shift destination game state is ST25 mode (probability change C)), and a probability variable jackpot 2 (shift destination game State is ST75 mode (probability variation B)) and probability variation jackpot 1 (transition destination game state is ST100 mode (probability variation A)) are applied to this example (given form (β)). In the illustration, for easy comparison of the three, all of them show "a big hit that gives 100 electric sapots". For each jackpot, the number of games required from the end of the electric support (101st game) to the ceiling game (1000th game) (referred to as "required number of games X" in this example) is as follows.

With reference to FIG. 33 (b), in the case of time saving A jackpot, after the jackpot game is completed, the state is shifted to a time saving state of 100 times of time saving, and this 100 times of time saving is counted. Therefore, the required number of games X is "900 games" (see "Time saving A" in FIG. 33(b)).
On the other hand, in the case of the ST mode shift trigger jackpot, the number of games from the end of the power supply until reaching the ceiling differs depending on the ST mode. Specifically, referring to "ST25", "ST75", and "ST100" in FIG.
In the case of the ST25 mode (25 times of ST + 75 times of time saving), 75 times of time saving after completion of ST25 are counted, so the required number of games X is "925 games".
In the case of the ST75 mode (75 times of ST + 25 times of time saving), 25 times of time saving after completion of ST75 are counted, so the required number of games X is "975 games".
In the case of the ST100 mode (100 ST times), the 100 games are in the ST mode until the end of the electrical support, so these 100 games are excluded from the count. Therefore, the required number of games X is 1000 games. In the case of the ST mode, the number of games required from the end of the electrical support until the ceiling number of games decreases as the degree of profit is relatively low in the ST mode.

To summarize the relationship shown in the figure, the above-mentioned "required number of games X" has a relationship of "time saving A (time saving number of times: 100 times)<ST25 mode<ST75 mode<ST100 mode". That is, the more the game mode (internal game game state) with a relatively lower profit degree is shifted, the more the number of games required to reach the ceiling after the end of the electric support (the number of games required in the normal mode (normal state)). It becomes a peculiar relationship that it decreases. This "reduced number of games to be executed in the normal mode (normal state)" can be said to be a rescue function with a different character than the ceiling privilege.

<Grant form (γ): Fig. 33 (c)>
(γ) The number of games in a specific variation pattern selection mode (specific Tcode) is counted, and if the counted number of games reaches a predetermined number of games without winning a jackpot, a ceiling privilege is awarded. In order to facilitate understanding of this example, as a virtual game machine, two games of "normal A mode" and "normal B mode" with different variation pattern selection modes are used as game modes corresponding to the normal mode. A game machine capable of transition control of a plurality of game machine modes including modes will be described as an example. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33(C), for example, the number of executed games in the "normal B mode" is counted. In this case, since the games executed in the "normal A mode" are not counted, the ceiling bonus will not be awarded no matter how many games are executed in the normal A mode, but the games executed during the "normal B mode" will not be awarded. A ceiling privilege can be provided when the number of games played reaches a predetermined number of games. It should be noted that the conditions for transitioning between the "normal A mode" and the "normal B mode" (conditions for transitioning to the variation pattern selection mode) include, for example, "causing a mode transition when winning a small prize" or "the number of games played ( change the number of times). Using this example, it is possible to create a game property such as the following (A) or (B).

[(A) A case in which the shift of the variation pattern selection mode is caused due to the small winning]
A case will be described in which the transition to the variation pattern selection mode is caused due to a small hit. As an example of this case, for example, if a small hit (winning probability 1/50) is provided on the special figure 1 side, and a small hit (promotion lottery) is won during the "normal A mode" regarding the transition to the variation pattern selection mode Then shift to "normal B" (shift to normal B mode after playing a small win game), and if you win a small win again during "normal B mode" (drop lottery), switch to "normal A mode" Shift (shift to normal A mode after small winning game). Regarding the provision of the ceiling privilege, if a predetermined number of games (for example, 70 games) are played without winning a small win or a big win in the "normal B mode" (70 games in a row during the normal B mode) case) Give the ceiling privilege. In this case, the ceiling privilege is not given no matter how many games are played in the normal A mode, but the ceiling privilege is given when 70 games are played in the normal B mode. Therefore, it is possible to create a novel game property in which the normal B mode functions as a "ceiling privilege giving chance period", that is, a "chance zone", which is advantageous to the player. A plurality of small wins may be provided, for example, when the first small win is won in the normal A mode, the mode is shifted to the normal B mode, and when the second small win is won in the normal B mode, the normal A is selected. You can switch to mode. In this case, the winning probabilities may be different between the first minor win and the second minor winning, or may be the same. In addition, it is possible to determine the odds of winning a small prize according to the set value. For example, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning the first small win (the small win that triggers the shift to the normal B mode (chance zone)), and the second small win (the chance to shift to the normal A mode). If the probability of winning a small win is set low, the higher the setting, the lower the probability of falling from the normal B mode. In other words, it is possible to create a game feature in which the higher the set value is, the higher the probability of granting the ceiling privilege is. Incidentally, the odds of winning a small prize, the variation pattern selection mode to be counted, and the number of games to be given the ceiling privilege can be appropriately determined in consideration of the playability.

[B: A case where the change pattern selection mode is caused to change due to the number of fluctuations]
Next, a case will be described in which the transition to the variation pattern selection mode is caused due to the number of variations. As an example of this case, for example, regarding the transition of the variation pattern selection mode, when the first number of games (for example, 50 games) are executed in the normal A mode, the transition is made to the "normal B mode", and the "normal B mode" When the second number of games (for example, 40 games) are executed during the game, the mode is shifted to the "normal A mode". Then, when the number of games in the normal B mode reaches a predetermined number (for example, 400 games), a ceiling privilege is given. In this example, 400 games, which is the number of games that reach the ceiling, can be reached by switching to the normal B mode 10 times. In addition, instead of fixing the number of games to reach the ceiling, a plurality of types of game numbers such as 400 games, 600 games, and 800 games are provided, and any number of games can be determined by lottery. may In this case, the number of games to reach the ceiling is randomized, and the fun of the game can be improved. Also, the higher the set value, the more likely a relatively small number of games (400 games) will be selected, and the lower the set value, the more likely a relatively large number of games (800 games) will be selected. If the lottery probability is determined according to the set value, the higher the setting, the easier it is to give the benefit of the ceiling privilege, and conversely, the lower the setting, the easier it is to give the benefit of the ceiling privilege. Also, depending on the number of games that reach the ceiling, it is possible to give the player an element of guessing the settings.

Further, instead of counting the number of games in a specific variation pattern selection mode, "the number of transitions to a specific variation pattern selection mode" may be counted. In this case, when the number of transitions to a specific variation pattern selection mode (normal B mode in this example) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the ceiling privilege can be given. Further, a plurality of types of the number of transitions may be provided (for example, 7, 8, 9, 10, etc.), and any number of transitions may be determined by lottery (lottery for the number of transitions). In this case, the higher the set value, the more likely a relatively small number of transitions (for example, 7 times) will be selected, and the lower the set value, the more likely a relatively large number of transitions (for example, 10 times) will be selected. If the lottery probability of the number of transitions is determined according to the set value, the higher the setting, the easier it is to give the benefit of the ceiling privilege, and conversely, the lower the setting, the easier it is to give the benefit of the ceiling privilege. Also, depending on the number of games that reach the ceiling, it is possible to give the player an element of guessing the settings.

<Grant form (δ)>
Also, instead of counting the number of times the special symbol variation display game is executed (the number of variations of the special symbol), (δ) "the number of times the normal symbol variation display game is performed (the number of times the normal symbol changes)" is counted. good too. In this case, it is preferable to count the "number of normal symbol fluctuations" during a game state involving a low probability state (normal state and/or time saving state). For example, by counting the number of executions of the normal pattern variation display game in the normal mode (normal state), when a predetermined number of games (for example, the 2000th game) is reached, a ceiling privilege can be given.

<Grant form (ε)>
In addition, (ε) the number of winning times of "minor wins" in which the condition device does not operate is counted, and when the number of times of winning reaches a predetermined number of times without winning a big win, a ceiling privilege can be given. For example, if the odds of winning a small win are set to 1/100 and the winning of a small win reaches 10 times, a ceiling privilege is given. In addition, instead of the number of times the "small win" is won, the number of times the special electric accessory is activated (the number of times the small win game is executed) when the small win is won may be counted. Further, a plurality of types of winning times may be provided (for example, 7 times, 8 times, 9 times, and 10 times), and any number of times may be determined by lottery (ceiling shift winning times lottery). In this case, the higher the set value, the more likely a relatively small number of wins (for example, 7) will be selected, and the lower the set value, the more likely a relatively large number of wins (for example, 10) will be selected. If the lottery probability of each number of times of winning is determined according to the set value, the higher the setting, the easier it is to give the benefit of the ceiling privilege, and conversely, the lower the setting, the easier it is to give the benefit of the ceiling privilege. Also, depending on the number of games that have reached the ceiling, it is possible to give the player a set speculation element (the same applies to the "given form ζ" described below).

<Grant form (ζ)>
Also, (ζ) the number of winnings of the “subsidiary win” is counted, and when a predetermined number of winnings is reached, a ceiling privilege can be provided. In this case, it is preferable to count the number of wins in the game state (normal state and/or latent probability state) with at least the auxiliary winning lottery probability low probability state (normal symbol probability variation function non-operation). It should be noted that instead of the number of winning times of "subsidiary hit", the number of times of execution of the general electric open game may be counted.

The granting modes (.epsilon.) and (.zeta.) are characterized in that the condition for granting the ceiling privilege does not depend on the number of executions of the symbol variation display game (the number of symbol variations).

It should be noted that, regarding the above embodiment, grant mode (α) and grant mode (β), it was explained that the ceiling privilege is given when a predetermined number of games (ceiling game number) is reached, but the present invention is not limited to this, The number of ceiling games may be determined by a predetermined lottery (number of ceiling games lottery) as in the provision mode (γ). Specifically, a plurality of ceiling game numbers (for example, 500 games, 700 games, and 1000 games) can be provided, and any ceiling game number can be determined by lottery. In this case also, the higher the set value is, the easier it is for a relatively small number of games to be selected, and the lower the set value is, the easier it is for a relatively large number of games to be selected. can be determined by

[Modified Example 2 of Privilege Grant Form (Split Privilege Grant Form): Fig. 34]
In the above-described embodiment and Modified Example 1 of the privilege giving mode, the ceiling activation trigger is explained once (the ceiling privilege is given at the 1000th game), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, multiple (at least two) times (at least two times) of privilege activation opportunities (small privilege grant opportunities) can be set, and major benefits (e.g., profits equivalent to ceiling benefits) can be granted by the small benefits granted by each privilege activation opportunity. It can be configured (divided privilege provision form). In terms of using the privilege activation opportunity multiple times, this modification 2 is more specific to a specific game state (for example, a normal state (for example, a normal state ( The purpose of "base up in normal mode))" is strong.

As a representative example of this modified example 2, for example, an upper limit is provided to the number of times of time saving to be given between big hits, and the number of times of time saving of the upper limit is divided into a plurality of times and given. Specifically, the “large privilege (equivalent to the ceiling privilege)” of a limited time reduction of 100 times is divided into four times by a “small privilege” of a limited time reduction of 25 times (divided grant). is. Therefore, this modification satisfies the following relational expression (10).

The upper limit of the number of times of saving time to be given (hereinafter referred to as "the number of times of saving time") is X times, the number of times of giving is Y times, and the number of times the upper limit number of times of saving time is divided (hereinafter referred to as "the number of times of saving time") is Zk times (k = 1 to Y: hereinafter may be simply referred to as "Z"),
"ΣZk=X k=1 to Y" (10)
meet. For example, if the upper limit number of times of shortening time X is 100 times and the number of times of splitting Y is 4 times, the total number of times of splitting time when giving 4 times before winning the next big hit (Z1 + Z2 + Z3 + Z4) is 100 of the upper limit number of times of shortening time A time saving state is given so that it becomes times (Z1 + Z2 + Z3 + Z4 = 100). Note that the number of divided time reductions Zk may be the same or substantially the same number of divided time reductions, or may be at least one different number of divided time reductions. That is, the configuration may be such that the small benefits with the same or substantially the same benefit are divided and given, or the configuration is possible that different small benefits are divided and given. As an example of the former, for example, the number of times of time reduction is divided into 4 times and the maximum number of times of time reduction is set to 100 times (the same number of times of time reduction is given). Let the number of times of reduced working hours be “20 times, 20 times, 20 times, and 40 times” (the number of times of reduced working hours that are partially different), “15 times, 35 times, 20 times and 30 times” (each of which is different number of times), etc. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which gives a small privilege with a relatively high degree of profit, so that the number of addictive games becomes relatively large. For example, the number of divided time reductions from the first time to the fourth time can be "10 times, 20 times, 30 times and 40 times".

It should be noted that the upper limit number of times of shortening of working hours X, the number of times of giving Y, and the number of times of dividing shortening of hours Z can be determined as appropriate in consideration of game characteristics and the like. For example, the upper limit number of times of saving time X can be set to the number of times (for example, 300 times) that satisfies the relationship of "upper limit number of times of saving time X>maximum number of times of saving time by big hit". However, in order not to give excessive benefits, the upper limit of the number of times of saving time X is at least the relationship that satisfies the "maximum number of times of saving time X ≤ maximum number of times of saving time by jackpot (100 times)" or "minimum number of times of saving time by jackpot (50 times) ≤ upper limit It is preferable to have a relationship that satisfies the number of times of time saving X<maximum number of times of time saving by big hit (100 times).

In addition, it is sufficient if there are a plurality of privilege triggers (grant number Y). It is also possible to appropriately determine the number of games in the state to be given, and the number of games to be given in a specific game state.

In addition, after the number of times of shortening of working hours (great privilege) for the maximum number of times of shortening of working hours is given, no more shortening of working hours is given, and the privilege is not given until the next big hit. After giving the big privilege, it is considered that sufficient privilege has been given, in other words, the relief function has been fulfilled, and the privilege is not given until the next big win. However, a ceiling privilege (FIGS. 7 and 23) may be provided separately. For example, after finishing giving the split privilege, if the player has played 1000 predetermined games without winning the next jackpot, the ceiling privilege can be given. Further, it is possible to construct a setting suggesting effect to appear in at least one of a plurality of privilege activation opportunities. In this case, when the privilege activation opportunity (privilege granting game) arrives, setting suggestion information can be obtained in addition to privilege granting, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Moreover, here, although the structure which gives a finite reduction in working hours as a special privilege was demonstrated, it is needless to say that it can apply also to finite probability variation or finite probability. In this case, if the above-mentioned "time saving number" is replaced with "ST number" and "time saving state" is appropriately read as "variable state" or "potential state", the finite probability variation (great privilege) is divided and granted (small privilege It is self-evident that it is a concept of a configuration in which a finite probability variation is granted multiple times) or a configuration in which a finite probability (large privilege) is divided and granted (a small privilege finite probability is granted multiple times). For example, the upper limit number of times of shortening of working hours X may be read as "the number of times of upper limit of ST", and the number of times of dividing shortening of working hours Z as "number of divided STs". As an example, in the above formula (10), the upper limit of the number of STs to be given (upper limit ST number) is X times, the number of times to be given is Y times, and the number of times the upper limit ST number is divided (divided ST number) is Zk times. (k=1 to Y) can be read as satisfying "ΣZk=X k=1 to Y".

(Specific example of modification 2: FIG. 34)
This modification (modification 2) can be broadly classified as a "periodic grant form" that grants benefits periodically (regularly), such as "a small privilege is granted each time a predetermined number of games are played". ”, and an “aperiodic provision form” in which division is not provided periodically. First, the cyclic application mode will be described with reference to FIG. 34 .

[Periodic application form]
<A. Specific example 1 of periodic application form (application form (κ)): FIG. 34 (a)>
FIG. 34(a) shows an example of the cyclic application form (application form (κ)). FIG. 34(a) shows that every time the symbol variation display game is executed for a predetermined number of games (here, 100 games) during the normal state (normal mode) after the end of the power supply due to the big hit (p0 in the drawing) ( p1, p3, p5, and p7 of illustration), "the limited time reduction of the number of times of time reduction 25 times (25 times of divided time reductions)" of a small privilege is given. Here, the number of grants is set to 4 times, and by granting a total of 4 small benefits, the grant of the major benefit “Limited time reduction of 100 times (maximum time reduction of 100 times)” is completed. case is shown.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34 (a), after the end of the power supply (p0), the 100th game from the 1st to the 100th game (p1) is controlled to the normal state (period without division), and the 101st game When the first privilege activation opportunity (privilege grant opportunity) arrives, a small privilege finite time reduction (time reduction number of times 25 times) is granted, and the 25 games from the 101st to 125th games (p2) are controlled in a time reduction state. (Controlled to a time-saving state by the first small privilege).
Next, the 100 games from the 126th to the 225th game (p3) are controlled again to the normal state (period without division), and the second privilege activation opportunity arrives in the 226th game, and the limited time of the small privilege ( Time saving number of times 25 times) is given, and 25 games from 226th to 250th game (p4) are controlled to a time saving state (controlled to a time saving state by the second small privilege).
Then, the 100 games from the 251st to the 350th game (p5) are controlled again to the normal state (period without division grant), and the third privilege activation opportunity arrives in the 351st game, and the finite time reduction of the small privilege ( Time saving number of times 25 times) is given, and it is controlled to the time saving state from the 351st to 375th game (p6) (controlled to the time saving state by the third small privilege).
Then, the 376th to 475th games (p7) are controlled again to the normal state, and the final (4th) privilege activation opportunity arrives in the 476th game, and the limited time reduction of the small privilege (time reduction number of times 25 times). Granted, controlled to the time-saving state from the 476th to the 500th game (p8) (controlled to the time-saving state by the fourth small privilege), and with the above, the grant of the great privilege “Limited time-saving of 100 times” is completed. do. That is, periodically (every 100 games), a small benefit (25 times of time saving) is divided into 4 times and given, and if you get addicted to 500 games after the end of the electric support, all of the upper limit of 100 times of time saving will be given. Become. In other words, such a form of giving is the same phenomenon as giving a maximum of 4 sets with a game period of ``100 games executed during normal state + 25 times of time saving'' as one set, and the limiter function. It can also be said that it has a privilege granting function. It should be noted that the production mode is not shown, but as in the above embodiment (FIGS. 6 and 7), if it is in the normal state (normal mode), it will be in the normal production mode, and if it is in the time saving state (time saving mode) Like the time-saving production mode (air combat mode), it may be configured so that the transition to the production mode according to the game state can be controlled.

(In the case of granting infinite benefits)
In the above example, the configuration for dividing and giving a finite reduction in working hours as a great benefit has been described, but the upper limit number of times of reducing working hours is infinite, that is, it can be configured to divide and give "infinite reduction in working hours". If the major privilege is "infinite reduction in working hours", for example, a predetermined number of divided times (small privilege) may be permanently given every 100 games until the next big hit is won. In addition, like FIG. 34 (a), the number of times of dividing time is given 25 times every 100 games, but in the 476th game (p7 of the last given time), an infinite number of times of time saving may be given as the number of times of division. In this case, the time saving state can be continued even after the 501st game. Of course, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which an infinite probability change or an infinite probability with an infinite maximum number of STs is dividedly given. In this case, in the same manner as already described, the above-mentioned "number of times of time saving" should be appropriately replaced with "number of times of ST" and "time saving state" with "variable probability state" or "potential state".

<B. Specific example 2 of periodic application form (application form (κ)): Fig. 34 (b)>
In the above-described provision form (κ), a periodic provision form of "dividing and giving ceiling benefits" has been described. Next, as other periodic grant forms, the profit state granted by winning the jackpot is "infinite short time", "limited time short", "infinite variable", "finite variable", "infinite potential", or "finite A configuration (granting form (λ)) for splitting and granting "latency" etc. with a plurality of privilege activation triggers will be described.

In this example, benefits such as time-saving state (infinite time-saving, finite time-saving), probability variable state (infinite probability change, finite probability change), potential probability state (infinite probability, finite probability), etc., given by winning the jackpot, multiple times It is a configuration that divides and grants according to the privilege activation opportunity. In other words, as in the above embodiment (see FIGS. 4, 6 to 7, etc.), instead of immediately giving the total time reduction number and the total ST number after the big hit game, it is given in small amounts over a long game period. It is a composition. In this example, in the case of a time-saving jackpot, the number of time-savings granted by the jackpot corresponds to the "maximum number of times of time-savings" (great privilege), and the number of times of time-savings to be split is equivalent to the above "number of times of splitting time-savings" (small privilege). do. In addition, in the case of a variable hit or latent hit, the number of STs given by the big hit corresponds to the "maximum number of STs" (great privilege), and the number of STs given separately is the above "divided ST number" (small privilege). corresponds to FIG. 34(b) shows a specific example thereof.

FIG. 34 (b) is a representative example of this example (given form (λ)), time-saving jackpots α to γ with different time-saving times (50 time-saving times finite time-saving jackpots, time-saving times 100 times finite time-saving jackpots, A case of winning the infinite short-time jackpot) is illustrated. Figure (A) shows a case of normal granting in which the number of times of time saving is given without dividing when the time saving jackpot of 50 times of time saving (equivalent to time saving jackpot 2 in FIG. 4) is won. If you win the time saving jackpot of 100 times (equivalent to the time saving jackpot 1 in Figure 4), the 100 times of the time saving is divided into 2 times and given (50 times of the time saving is divided into 2 times. (C) shows the case of split granting), and Figure (C) shows that when winning a time-saving jackpot that gives an infinite number of times of time-saving (including the number of times that is virtually infinite), the number of times of time-saving is given 50 times for the first time, and the second time. It shows the case of giving an infinite number of times to .

With reference to FIG. 34 (B), as shown in FIGS. (A) to (C), if any of the time-saving jackpots α to γ is won, no matter which jackpot is won, the number of times of time-saving first 50 times are provided, and after that, different game transitions are traced according to the jackpot type won. Here, as shown in the figure, when it is determined that the production modes are shared, the following game characteristics can be created.

(Time-saving secret game)
When the time-saving jackpots α to γ are won, the jackpot types won in the performance during the pattern variation display game (announcement performance including the decoration stop pattern, etc.) and the performance during the winning are hidden. And the production mode after the jackpot game is also a common time-saving production mode (air battle mode: see FIGS. 29 to 31) up to the first 50 times (between 1 and 50 games) ), and the subsequent 51st game to 150th game are also in common normal effect mode (for example, general effect mode) (p0 to p1 section in the drawing). Therefore, the type of winning big win is hidden from the performance until the 150th game is over, and during this time, the player enjoys the game while expecting to win the time-saving big win β or time-saving big win γ. Here, if the jackpot won this time is the time-saving jackpot α, the normal production mode is continued after the 151st game (after p1), so at this time, the jackpot won this time was the time-saving jackpot α. It will become clear. However, if the winning jackpot is the time-saving jackpot β or the time-saving jackpot γ, the time-saving state occurs in the 151st game, and the mode is shifted to the time-saving production mode again. Which one of γ is elected is kept secret. Therefore, the player enjoys the game while hoping that the time-saving state will not end at 200 games (p2 in the figure) (expecting the winning of the time-saving jackpot γ). If the time-saving state continues after the 201st game, it is determined that the winning jackpot is the time-saving jackpot γ, that is, the time-saving infinite, and the player can proceed with the game under the high-base state until the next big win with peace of mind. can be done. In this way, by gradually revealing the number of time reductions in the hidden state, the player's expectation for the continuation of the electric support, the tension of the end of the electric support, and the exhilaration when the continuation of the electric support is revealed. It is possible to create such a game property (time saving secret game). In addition, under the time-saving state after the 201 game where the infinite time-saving is known, the normal time-saving production mode (air combat mode) may be used, but as shown in the figure, a special time-saving production mode different from the normal time-saving production mode (for example, , a background display (not shown) different from that in the air battle mode) may be displayed to deterministically notify that the time was infinite.

It should be noted that in the above, the number of time-saving hits α ~ γ (limited time-savings jackpot with 50 times of time-savings, finite time-savings jackpot with 100 times of time-savings, and infinite time-savings jackpot) were explained, but at least the number of time-savings If there are two different time-saving jackpots, the time-saving number of times secret game as described above can be realized. In the example of FIG. 34 (b), the time saving jackpots α to γ with different number of times of time saving were explained, but a plurality of probability variable jackpots with different ST numbers (for example, finite probability variable jackpot α with ST number 50 times, ST number 100 The same phenomenon applies to the finite probability variable jackpot β and infinite probability variable jackpot γ).

[Aperiodic application form]
<Grant form (μ)>
In the above-described provision forms (κ) and (λ), a form in which a small privilege is given periodically has been described, but a form in which a small privilege is given aperiodically may be used (aperiodic provision form). For example, the privilege activation timing is the 200th game, the 350th game, the 600th game, and the 800th game. In the case of an aperiodic provision form, a plurality of privilege activation opportunities may be determined by lottery, or a plurality of privilege activation scenarios (scenarios in which the number of privilege activation games is predetermined) may be set. It is also possible to provide a configuration in which one of the privilege activation trigger scenarios can be determined by lottery. Other points (matters related to major benefits, minor benefits, etc.) overlap with those described in the above-described granting modes (κ) and (λ), so detailed description is omitted.

[Other grant forms]
<Grant form (ν)>
In the above-described divided privilege grant form, a mode has been described in which the small privilege is split and granted with the profit of the large privilege as the upper limit. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the profit of the special privilege is not set as the upper limit. For example, a "specific privilege" is given periodically or aperiodically, but the upper limit of the benefit to be given is not set. In short, the major benefits are infinite benefits (infinite time reduction, infinite probability variation or infinite latent probability), and the small benefits are finite benefits (time saving state of a predetermined number of times of time reduction, finite probability variation of a predetermined number of STs or a predetermined ST It is a configuration in which small benefits are given periodically or aperiodically until the next big win without limitation to the number of times Y given. In this example, there is no limit to the number Y of grants (infinite number of times), which is different from the "divided grant" which has an upper limit. For this example, for example, if you explain using FIG. The grant is not completed at p8 (fourth time), and is permanently granted until the next big hit. Also, for example, if explained using FIG. 34 (B) (C), at the time of p2, instead of switching the privilege to be granted to "infinite time saving", the small privilege "Limited time saving of 50 times" , and p2 onwards are also given periodically (given every 100 games in the normal state). In addition, when the number of grants reaches a predetermined specified number of times or a specified number of games, the advantage (profit status) of the small privilege may be increased. For example, using FIG. 34 (b), if the number of grants reaches 10 times, the current small privilege "Limited time reduction of 25 times" is relatively more advantageous "Time reduction number 50 times of limited working hours" (medium privilege). A condition for switching from a small privilege to a medium privilege may be a case where a predetermined prescribed number of awards and/or a prescribed prescribed number of games have been reached.

The present invention including the technical ideas related to the above-described embodiments and their modifications (applied forms (α) to (μ): FIGS. 33 to 34) are configured as follows (configuration A) to (configuration G).
(Configuration A)
a launching means capable of shooting game balls into the game area;
A lottery means for executing a lottery for a winning when the starting means detects a game ball;
a symbol display means for performing a variable display operation of the symbol and displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery means in a stopped display mode of the symbol;
a profit state generation means capable of generating a profit state advantageous to the player based on a predetermined generation condition,
The profit status generation means is
Winning game execution control means for controlling the execution of a winning game when the lottery by the lottery means is won;
a first profit state generating means for generating a first profit state after the winning game is over;
a second profit state generating means for generating a second profit state when a specific occurrence condition is established without executing the winning game after a predetermined start condition is established;
A gaming machine characterized by:
(Configuration B)
The first profit state and the second profit state are the same profit state,
The game machine of the above configuration A characterized by:
(Configuration C)
The first profit state and the second profit state are different profit states,
The game machine according to the above configuration A, characterized by:
(Configuration D)
a lower profit position in said second profit position than in said first profit position;
The game machine according to the above configuration A, characterized by:
(Configuration E)
The first profit state ends when a predetermined game period elapses after starting after the winning game ends,
After the second profit state is started after the specific occurrence condition is established, the second profit state is temporarily terminated when a predetermined game period elapses, and the second profit state is restarted when the specific occurrence condition is established again. ,
The game machine according to the above configuration A or the above configuration B, characterized by:
(Configuration F)
The first profit state ends when a predetermined number of games has elapsed after starting after the end of the winning game,
The second profit state is started after the specific occurrence condition is established, and continues until the winning game is won.
The gaming machine according to the above configuration A or the above configuration C, characterized by:
(Configuration G)
The first profit state ends when the first game period elapses after starting after the winning game ends,
The second profit state is started after the specific occurrence condition is established, ends when a second game period shorter than the first game period elapses, and ends when the specific occurrence condition is established again. 2 profit status is resumed,
The gaming machine according to any one of the configuration A, the configuration C, and the configuration D, characterized by:

[Second embodiment]
<Ball output performance with electric sapo>
By the way, in recent years, due to legal requirements, it is required to moderately suppress arousal of gambling. In the time saving state or the probability variable state, it becomes a state with an electric sapo, and is controlled under a higher base state than the normal state (low base state without an electric sapo). This state with electric support (high base state) is a game state that is advantageous to the player in that the player can aim for the next big win without reducing the number of balls in his possession more than in the normal state. However, if the base value (so-called ball output rate: "safe ball number / out ball number" x 100) is excessively lowered in order to suppress gambling, the player will The speed at which the number of balls in the player's possession decreases is accelerated, which not only reduces the player's desire to play, but also results in an increase in the amount of money spent by the player (amount of money spent). will reduce the desire to play. In particular, when infinite time reduction or infinite probability variation is given as a ceiling privilege, most of the players continue the game until the next big win is won, so the more games are played until the next big win is won, the higher the number of games. The number of balls you have will also decrease. In other words, the player is greatly addicted to the game and faces a situation where the investment amount increases even during the ceiling privilege, and the player's desire to play the game is remarkably reduced. In addition, since many players continue to play the game in order to receive the benefits of the special ceiling privilege, the amount of money spent continues to increase, and the significance of the ceiling function as a relief function for addiction is lost. It can also be arousing the heart.

Therefore, it is necessary to devise a method that does not drastically reduce the number of balls held. For example, it is appropriate to set the ball payout rate (base value) in the high base state to at least "100%≦ball payout rate" from the viewpoint of suppressing the player's willingness to play and gambling. Preferably, "100%≦ball output rate≦120% to 130%". A specific configuration for achieving such a high base state ball payout rate will be described in detail below.

In the case of the present embodiment, as already explained, depending on the game state, either "left-handed" or "right-handed" is shot in an advantageous direction. Therefore, there is a winning possibility in the general winning ports 43a to 43d (first general winning means) and the upper starting port 34 (first starting means) belonging to the left-flowing path 3b, but it belongs to the right-flowing path 3c. The general winning opening 43e (second general winning means) and the lower starting opening 35 (second starting means) never win. On the other hand, if it is in a state with an electric sapo, it will be "right-handed advantage", so there is a possibility of winning a prize in the general winning opening 43e and the lower starting opening 35 (special figure 2 starting opening) belonging to the right downstream path 3c. , There is no winning in the general winning openings 43a to 43d and the upper starting opening 34 (special figure 1 starting opening) belonging to the left downstream route 3b. In addition, in general gaming machines, the ball output rate (low base ball output rate) in the state without electric support (normal state or latent probability state) is generally 30% to 40% (at least less than 100%, preferably less than 50%), the ball output rate (ball output rate at high base) in the state with electric support (time saving state or probability variable state) is generally 80% to 95%, both of which are less than 100% ( if you left it on). If the game machine 1 is used to explain, the assumed design value of the ball output rate is, for example, the average number of prizes won per minute in the state without the power supply, and the general prize gates 43a to 43d (three prize balls). are 2, 0.6, 0.4 and 1.04, respectively, and if the upper starting port 34 (4 prize balls) is "5.52", the ball output rate at low base is On the other hand, regarding the average number of prizes won per minute without an electric sapo, the general prize opening 43e (three prize balls) was 12.5, the lower start opening 35 (one prize ball). ) is 58.2, the ball payout rate at high base is 95.7%.

Here, as in the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the case of a gaming machine that requires a distinction between “left-handed” and “right-handed” depending on the game state, the above-mentioned ball output rate at the high base is set to In order not to decrease extremely, the arrangement configuration and prize It can be realized by devising the number of balls. Specifically, it can be realized by the following methods (A) to (H).

(A) Increase the number of prize balls in the general winning opening 43e and/or the lower starting opening 35 (starting opening on the side of the normal variable winning device 41 (starting opening with electric chew)). Specifically, the number of prize balls is determined to be larger in the number of prize balls in the general winning opening belonging to the right flowing path 3c than in the general winning opening belonging to the left flowing path 3b. Alternatively, the number of prize balls in the lower starting port 35 is determined to be larger than the number of prize balls in the general winning port belonging to the left downstream path 3b. Alternatively, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening belonging to the right flowing path 3c and the lower starting opening 35 is determined to be larger than the number of winning balls of the general winning opening belonging to the left flowing path 3b. For example, the number of general prize winning openings 43e is four, or the number of lower starting openings 35 is two.

(B) At least increase the number of general winning holes 43e (increase the number of general winning holes belonging to the right-flowing path 3c from 1 to 2, and increase the number of winnings (number of winnings/minute) for the general winning holes when hitting to the right. bottom up). Specifically, the number of general winning openings (installed number) belonging to the right flowing path 3c is larger than the number of general winning openings (installed number) belonging to the left flowing path 3b. In the present embodiment, four general prize-winning openings (general prize-winning openings 43a to 43d) belonging to the left flow path 3b are arranged. For example, it may be 2 to 4, which is more than that.

(C) At least increase the winning rate (ball entry rate) of the general winning hole 43e (for example, increase from 12.5 balls/minute to 20 balls/minute). When providing a plurality of general winning openings 43e, at least one winning rate is increased. Specifically, the ball-entering rate M of the general winning hole belonging to the right-flowing path 3c is determined to be higher than the ball-entering rate N of the general winning hole belonging to the left-flowing path 3b.
In addition, in the case of this embodiment, since a plurality of general prize winning openings 43a to 43d are arranged, the following configuration may be adopted. When the lowest ball-entering rate among the general prize-winning holes 43a to 43d is "Nmin" and the highest ball-entering rate is "Nmax", the following relational expression (Formula 1) or (Formula 2) is satisfied. can do.
(Formula 1) "Nmin<M"
(Formula 2) “Nmax<M”
Also, in the case of this embodiment, there is one general prize winning opening 43e, but if a plurality of general winning openings 43e are provided, the following configuration may be adopted. When the lowest ball-entering rate of the general prize-winning hole 43e among the plurality of general prize-winning holes 43e is "Mmin" and the highest ball-entering rate is "Mmax", the following relational expressions (Formula 3) to (Formula 6) ) can be configured to satisfy either
(Formula 3) "N<Mmin" (when there is one general winning opening belonging to the left downstream path 3b)
(Formula 4) “Nmin<Mmin”
(Formula 5) “Nmax<Mmin”
(Formula 6) “Nmax<Mmax”

(D) Start INT (interval time until start of opening of movable wing piece 47) and/or end INT (interval time until the end of the electric open game after the opening operation of movable wing piece 47 is completed) of general electric open game ) (eg, starting INT and/or ending INT from 500 ms to 700 ms). In this case, it is possible to increase the number of balls in hand (increase the ball output rate) by avoiding wasteful balls (death balls) when hitting and holding, so-called "stopping shots". For example, the ball payout rate (BA) can be about 95% in the case of continuous hitting, and about 120% in the case of stopping shots. This stopping effect is particularly effective when the number of prize balls at the lower starting port 35 is large (for example, about 3 to 4).

(E) Provide one or a plurality of small hits that cause a small hit game operation that does not increase or decreases the number of paid balls during the small hit game (in this embodiment, at least the small hit on the special figure 2 side provided). For example, the opening time of the big prize opening is set to a short time (approximately 0.1 second to 1 second), and the "start INT and/or end INT (the total time of each INT may be sufficient)", which is the closing period of the big prize opening, is the second. It is a small hit game operation that takes a long time of order (for example, about 1 second to 5 seconds). Such a small-hit game has a low ball-out performance, and when the game ball is left unattended, the number of balls paid out does not increase (the ball-out rate during the small-hit game is 100%), or the number of balls paid out may decrease. (The payout rate during the small winning game is less than 100%). In this case, as in the case of (D) above, by making full use of the "stopping shot" during the start INT and the end INT, it is possible to increase the number of balls in hand against the ball output performance during the small win game. Therefore, the ball output rate can be improved. In particular, if a small win is won with a high probability (increase the frequency of occurrence of a small win game), for example, at least about 1/5 to 1/20, the effect is further enhanced.

(F) The number of prize balls for the lower starting port 35 is set to be smaller than the number of prize balls for the upper starting port 34 . If the number of prize balls on the side of the starter that can win frequently during the electric sapo is increased, the stopping effect will increase (the degree of technical intervention will increase), and there is a risk of inviting a sense of inequality among players. . Therefore, it is preferable to use a winning opening other than the lower starting opening 35 (particularly, a general winning opening belonging to the right downstream path 3c) as the winning opening that greatly affects the ball payout rate.

(G) The number of prize balls for the lower starting opening 35 is set to be smaller than the number of prize balls for the general winning opening belonging to the right downstream path 3c. The number of winning balls in the "lower start hole 35" where the winning rate is different due to the stopping shot is higher than that of the "general winning hole (general winning hole 43e) belonging to the right downstream path 3c" in which the winning rate is not different due to the stopping shot. By increasing the number of prize balls, it is possible to reduce the capture factor by stopping shots.

(H) The number of prize balls in the lower starting port 35 is one, and the number of prize balls in the general winning port belonging to the right downstream path 3c is at least two. When the number of prize balls from the lower starting port 35 is 1, even if the winning rate is 100%, the net increase in number is 0, and how to make full use of the stopping shot by aiming at the opening operation of the lower starting port 35. In both cases, the number of balls possessed by the player does not increase. Therefore, the number of prize balls in the lower starting port 35 is one, and the number of prize balls in the general winning prize port belonging to the right flow path 3c is at least two. It is possible to improve the ball rate.

In the case of (D) or (E) described above, there is a risk of creating a sense of inequality in the profits earned between those who make full use of stopping shots and those who do not. Therefore, it is preferable to employ the configurations (A) to (C) and (F) to (H) described above regarding the general winning openings that do not have the stopping effect. In particular, the configurations of (B), (C), (F) to (H) described above are effective in reducing the stop shot effect and improving the payout rate. Further, the number of the general prize winning openings belonging to the left downstream path 3c and the general winning openings belonging to the right downstream path 3c can be one or more.

(Modified example of model type)
In this embodiment, the ST type model has been described. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the ST type, but may be a model in which the game state transition mode is determined as follows, for example, the following (machine 1) to (machine 3) models.

(machine 1) "V variable type"
A specific area through which a game ball can pass is provided in the big winning opening, and when one or more specific jackpots (for example, probability variable jackpots 1 to 7) are won, the game ball can easily pass through the specific area. ), on the other hand, when other jackpots (for example, time-saving jackpots 1 and 2) are won, it is configured to make it difficult or impossible to pass through the specific area, and when the game ball passes through the specific area (so-called " Only for V winning "), it may be a so-called "V probability variation type" model, such as activating a special symbol probability variation function and shifting to a probability variation state or a latent probability state.

(Machine 2) "Fall lottery type"
In the case of a game state with a high probability state (latent probability state or probability variable state), every game, with a predetermined fall probability, a transition lottery (fall lottery) from a high probability state to a low probability state is performed. A "lottery type" model may be used. In this falling lottery type, when the falling lottery is won, the winning game (falling game) is shifted to a low probability state (at least the special symbol probability variable function is set to OFF), and the jackpot lottery in the winning game is also in a low probability state. It is designed to be selected by lottery. There are the following cases (A) to (C) in the game state transition mode when winning the fall lottery. (A) probability variable state (ST mode) → time-saving state (time-saving mode), (B) probability variable state → normal state (normal mode), (C) potential probability state (potential probability mode) → normal state (normal mode). In such a falling lottery type, the falling game is shifted to a game state involving at least a low probability state. Therefore, when the execution game in the normal state or the time saving state is counted as the ceiling game, it is preferable to count the falling game as the first game. It should be noted that, excluding the falling game, the next game may be counted as the first game.

The ST type model described in the above embodiment and the fall lottery type of this example (machine 2) are mainly based on "presence or absence of a fall lottery (fall lottery means)" and "fall transition control based on the result of the fall lottery ( The only difference is the presence or absence of the falling transition control means). Therefore, regarding the matters related to the game described in the present embodiment (for example, FIGS. 21 to 34), before winning the falling lottery (in the case of a game state with a high probability state) Applicable to embodiments related to ST mode After winning the drop lottery (if you win the drop lottery and transition to a game state with a low probability state), in the embodiment related to the normal state or the time saving state (game state after the fall transition) Applicable.

By the way, the conventional drop lottery type has only one drop probability regardless of the jackpot type (type of winning pattern), and the game tends to be monotonous and lacks interest in the game. Therefore, a plurality of fall probabilities are provided according to the types of big hits. In this case, the fall probabilities may be different for each jackpot, or the fall probabilities may be partially the same or different. Assuming that the game machine 1 according to the above embodiment is a "falling lottery type", for example, the probability of falling is 1/200, 1/150, 1/100, 1/200, 1/150, 1/100 Jackpots 4 to 7 (special 2 side) have different fall probabilities if you win a jackpot belonging to the special 1 side, such as 1/240, and the same fall probability if you win a jackpot on the special 2 side. can be Further, as means for providing a plurality of fall probabilities, it is possible to determine fall probabilities corresponding to set values (settings 1 to 6). In other words, at least the first setting value and the second setting value can be configured to have different fall probabilities. For example, it can be determined that the lower the set value is, the higher the fall probability is.

In addition, the number of STs may be the same number of STs for each big hit, may be different for each, or may be partially different. Also, the number of STs can include not only a finite number of times but also an infinite number of times. For example, like variable probability jackpots 1 to 7 shown in FIG. 4, the number of STs may be 25, 75, or 100, or the number of STs for each jackpot may be 100 or infinite. However, in the case of the falling lottery type, if the falling lottery is won before the number of STs is consumed, the state is forcibly shifted to a low probability state (the number of STs is forcibly set to zero). Further, when the falling lottery is won, the setting suggestion effect (the setting suggestion effect at the time of falling) may be executed by the effect means. In this case, it is possible to determine the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect at the time of falling according to the set value.

Regarding the fall lottery type, for example, the following configurations (T1) to (T3) can be used.
(T1)
Acquisition means (for example, FIG. 11 S314: In the case of this example, a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for judging a special symbol, a random number for a variation pattern, and a random number for judging a fall are configured to be obtainable);
lottery means (S410 in FIG. 12) for executing a lottery for a plurality of types of wins based on the first game information acquired by the acquisition means;
Symbol display means (special symbol display device 38, S309 in FIG. 10) for performing a variable display operation of symbols and displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery means in a stopped display mode of symbols;
Winning game execution control means (FIG. 17) for controlling the execution of a winning game when the symbols are stopped and displayed in a specific display mode in the symbol display means (when the lottery result of the lottery means is a win);
After the winning game is finished, probability fluctuation control means (S412 in FIG. 12, FIG. 15, FIG. 18) capable of controlling a high probability state in which the lottery probability of winning by the lottery means is higher than a predetermined normal probability. , FIGS. 21 and 22) and
Fall lottery means (main) for executing a fall lottery to determine whether to shift from the high probability state to the low probability state based on the second game information (random value for falling judgment) when the high probability state is in progress. a control unit 20);
A game machine T comprising drop transition control means (main control unit 20) for controlling the transition from the high probability state to the low probability state when the fall lottery is won,
The plurality of types of hits include at least a first hit and a second hit,
When the first win is won (when the winning game by the first win is executed) and when the second win is won (when the winning game by the second win is executed), the above The fall lottery probability by the fall lottery means can be configured to be different.

(T2)
The game machine T is configured such that the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a predetermined result differs according to a set value that can be changed in a plurality of steps. In this case, the set values that can be changed in a plurality of steps include at least a first set value and a second set value, and the fall probability is different between the first set value and the second set value. be able to.

(T3)
The game machine T is configured such that the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery results in a predetermined result differs according to a set value that can be changed in a plurality of stages,
The plurality of types of hits include at least a first hit and a second hit,
The setting values that can be changed in multiple stages include at least a first setting value and a second setting value,
The fall lottery probability by the fall lottery means is different between when the first win is won and when the second win is won,
When the set value is the first set value, at least the second win may not be included in the results of the lottery by the lottery means.

In addition, the game machine T is configured to be able to control a plurality of types of game states (at least two game states including the variable probability state and/or the latent probability state among the variable probability state, the latent probability state, the time saving state and the normal state). can do. Further, in the above ((T1) to (T3), when the fall lottery by the fall lottery means is won, setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect suggesting the current set value can be further provided. .

(Machine 3) "Limiter mounted type"
When a jackpot is won (or when a specific jackpot is won), it has a limiter function that limits the number of times that the probability fluctuation control means shifts to a high probability state to a predetermined upper limit number of times (limit number of times). The model may be a "limiter-equipped type" model. This limiter-equipped type corresponds to, for example, the so-called "limiter machine (set type)" disclosed in Japanese Patent No. 5075301, and the like.

In the case of the limiter type, the game state after the jackpot game is changed to a game state with a high probability state ( It is designed to shift to a definite variable state or latent definite state). For example, when the limit number of times is 5 times, the game state after the big win game is controlled to a high probability state from the first big win to the fourth big win, and the big win lottery benefits under the high probability state until the maximum four big wins. It is now possible to receive However, when the fifth big hit is won, the "limiter function" starts operating as the limit number of times has been reached (limiter function ON), and the game state after the jackpot game ends is a game state with a low probability state (time saving state or normal state). When a big win is won during the operation of this limiter function, the limiter function in operation is canceled (limiter function is turned off), and the game state after the end of the big win game shifts to a game state with a high probability state until the limit number of times is reached again. be done. In this respect, a limiter machine with a limit number of times of 5 is also called a "five-pack machine".

By the way, the conventional limiter machine has only one type of limit number, and the game tends to be monotonous and lacks interest in the game. Therefore, a plurality of types of limit times are provided according to the types of jackpots. In this case, the number of limit times may be different for each big win, or the number of limit times may be partially different.

For example, jackpots A to D may be provided, and the number of jackpots A to D may be limited to 2, 3, 4, or 5 times. Also, the symbol lottery rate for each big hit can be determined as appropriate. In addition, depending on which jackpot is won, it is possible to appropriately determine whether to shift to the variable probability state or to the latent probability state. For example, all of the jackpots A to C may be shifted to the probability variable state or the latent probability state, or only one or more specific jackpots may be shifted to the probability variable state (for example, when jackpot A is won shifts to the probability variable state, and shifts to the latent probability state when the other big hits B, C, and D are won). In addition, although the number of STs is preferably infinite, the number of STs may be the same for each jackpot, the number of STs may be different, or the number of STs may be partially different. In addition, when the number of STs is finite, even if the number of STs ends and the state is shifted to the normal state or the time saving state, the game state after the big hit game is returned to the high probability state again until the limit number of times is reached. It can be shifted to a game state with In addition, when a specific jackpot is won among jackpots A to D, it may be shifted to a game state with a low probability state (time saving state or normal state) without shifting to a high probability state, or to a time saving state. It can be determined as appropriate whether to shift to the normal state or to shift to the normal state.

In the case of the limiter machine as well, regarding the game characteristics described in the present embodiment (for example, FIGS. 21 to 34), the game state involving a high probability state before reaching the limiter count is applied to the ST mode embodiment. It is possible, and regarding the game state with a low probability state after reaching the limit number of times, it is applicable to the embodiment regarding the normal state and the time saving state (game state after reaching the limit number of times).

One or more of all the embodiments described above (including all of the configurations and modifications described in each embodiment) may be combined, and the contents described in each embodiment are only for individual embodiments. It is not limited.

Also, in each of the above-described embodiments, the gaming machine using game balls as the game medium has been described, but the gaming machine is not particularly limited as long as it can achieve the object of the present invention. For example, a game machine that uses game medals as game media, and a game machine that manages information about game media (wins, prize balls, etc.) using electromagnetic recording means (so-called “enclosed It may be a game machine such as a type game machine (management type game machine).

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY The present invention is useful for gaming machines.

1 game machine,
2 front frame (door),
3, 3a game board, game area,
19 game ball dispensing device,
20 main control unit (main control board),
24 production control unit (production control board, liquid crystal control board)
28 launch control board,
29 payout control board,
34, 34a upper starting port, upper starting port sensor 35, 35a lower starting port, lower starting port sensor,
37, 37a normal symbol start opening, normal symbol start opening sensor,
38a, 38b special pattern display device,
39a normal pattern display device,
50, 52a large winning opening, large winning opening sensor 41, 41c normal fluctuation winning device, normal electric accessory solenoid,
52, 52c special variable winning device, big winning opening solenoid,
36, 45, 46 liquid crystal displays, decorative lamps, speakers,
49 out port,
94 setting key switch,
95 setting change switch,
96 setting change completion switch,
97 setting indicator,
98 RAM clear switch,
201, 202, 203 main control CPU, main control ROM, main control RAM,
241, 242, 243 production control CPU, production control ROM, production control RAM.

Claims (1)

a launching means capable of shooting game balls into the game area;
a starting means capable of detecting a game ball;
Lottery means for executing a lottery for a plurality of types of hits when the starting means detects a game ball;
a display means capable of variable display of patterns;
display control means for controlling the display means;
a winning game execution control means for controlling execution of a winning game when the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning;
A first game state in which the winning lottery probability is the first probability and a ball entering state to the starting means is a normal state, and the winning lottery probability is the first probability and the start. A gaming machine comprising game state control means capable of controlling at least a second game state in which the state of ball entry into the means is more advantageous than the normal state,
When the winning game is executed by the winning game execution control means, a first privilege granting means capable of granting a first privilege of controlling to the second game state after execution of the winning game;
After a predetermined start condition is satisfied, when the winning game is not executed by the winning game execution control means and the number of symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times, control is performed from the first game state to the second game state. a second privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege to
counting means for counting the number of times the symbol changes after the predetermined start condition is met;
The first privilege is the first privilege in which the period controlled to the second game state is the first period, and the second period the period controlled to the second game state is longer than the first period including a certain B first privilege,
The second privilege is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege B,
Regardless of whether it is in the first game state or the second game state, the predetermined number of times includes the number of times of variation of the symbol whose lottery probability of winning is the first probability. Differentiate the period until the second privilege is granted by the second privilege granting means after the end of the second game state depending on whether the privilege is granted or the first privilege B is granted,
The display control means sets the period until the second privilege is granted to the display means, regardless of whether the first privilege is granted or the first privilege is granted. Suggestive display is possible ,
The suggestive indication is
When displayed in a normal mode, it does not suggest the expectation that the lottery result in the variation is a hit,
When displayed in a special mode different from the normal mode, it suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the variation is a hit,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images